Home

Model 60i - Thermo Scientific

1. i T 2 Electrochemical Cal Out Valve R i f Hon Oz Sensor optional Lis o Source Temp iu X JB Thermistor not shown frr ET Motor and Wheel Assy Paramagnetic Oz Sensor i optional not shown CaF2 Window Assy e ib Entrance Mirror in o y Relay Mirror q e Optical Bench Detector Assy Fan e sje a Field Mirror o 3 Way Cal Valve Cal Pressure Exit Mirror How Transducer Switch Figure 7 2 Model 60i Component Layout Removing the The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel Measurement Case be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Assembly and Lowering gu 7 3 the Partition Panel 7 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS Pass Through Connectors SLIDE CASE ASSEMBLY OUT Remove Screw Partition Panel Loosen Captive Remove Hidden Screw LOWER PANEL Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment
2. E 2 gt ion co oc E o E a gt c LLI ureiq Og 1ut0d maq jyuoeDes z N Le dung Onpisuegd Josuas dis jeje M 1 Wd71 918 OA OL dung ejdures Sur ojdures poor yay sneux3 l E j ul ajdwes Bl 1 l i SA Y 19114 101191 7 T INO 189 gt gt eur uoneJgieo ul 189 lt h lt JozAjeuy 109 K ueds zo Y zoo UeaJisuMop pesn eA e ajpesu Jo JezA EUV 109 1 Asejiideo jo aoroyo uo Bulpuadap isd uoneJqieo ueis S 10 Wd xI uedg 02 0 01 01 lensn eunssaid ewes eui 9 01 G JO uomneJqy eo 1911p 10 p ueds ZON 0 pere nDoJ eje sese uoneiqi eo v Wd 0 Z 01 I 01 MOI 19U1s84 eA e ejpeeu JO sane ideo j ueds ON pioiueu o suonoeuuoo seb uoieJqieo A weds eos ploylueyy sec uoneiqieo USBON 0Ja7 19114 eiejnonied pereeH 4 Jeyreg SOI pH BuisnoH 9QOI4 Figure 4 3 Model 607 Plumbing Configuration 4 9 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required In the configuration shown in Figure 4 3 the calibration gas manifold Model 61 or similar is connected directly to the Model 60 Cal In bulkhead and a calibration gas line runs from the Cal Out bulkhead to the sample probe System calibrations and direct analyzer calibrations are both available If the system incorp
3. xm Lo e e f ere n are cp i ED qu qo Hn Hn t3 amp Gg JABBER pm e E 4 Mounting Studs 2 Front Panel Board Replacement 7 52 Model 60i Instruction Manual A Figure 7 22 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 23 Equipment Required Eront panel board Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific LCD Module Replacement A A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing LCD Module Replacement LCD Module
4. 0 NONE 1 amp 2 NONE 384 NONE 5 amp 6 NONE 788 NONE 9 amp 10 CO CONCENTRATION 11812 NO CONCENTRATION 13814 NONE 15816 C02 CONCENTRATION 17818 NONE 19820 NONE 21822 NONE 23824 NONE 25826 NOX CONCENTRATION 27828 02 CONCENTRATION 29830 S02 CONCENTRATION 31832 N02 CONCENTRATION 33834 ANALOG IN 1 35836 ANALOG IN 2 37838 ANALOG IN 3 39840 ANALOG IN 4 41842 ANALOG IN 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported C 12 Model 60i Instruction Manual Register Number Variable 43844 ANALOG IN 6 45846 ANALOG IN 7 47848 ANALOG IN 8 49850 BENCH PRESSURE 51852 SOURCE TEMPERATURE 53854 BENCH TEMPERATURE 55856 DETECTOR TEMPERATURE 57858 CHANNEL 2 ABSORBANCE 59860 CHANNEL 3 ABSORBANCE 61862 CHANNEL 4 ABSORBANCE 63864 CHANNEL 5 ABSORBANCE 65866 CHANNEL 6 ABSORBANCE 67868 CHANNEL 7 ABSORBANCE 69870 CHANNEL 8 ABSORBANCE 71872 CHANNEL 9 ABSORBANCE 73874 CHANNEL 10 ABSORBANCE 75876 CHANNEL 11 ABSORBANCE 77818 CHANNEL 12 ABSORBANCE 79880 CO contents current selected cyl 81882 CO2 contents current selected cyl 83884 NO contents current selected cyl 85886 NO2 contents current selected cyl 8 888 S02 contents current selected cyl 89890 02 contents current selected cyl 91892 NONE 93894 EXTERNAL ALARMS 9589
5. e 1 7 a O E Cr O Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function E Soft Keys The A soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys Cr Run The Cv is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the current concentrations Cm Menu The Cm is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen orto back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens
6. XXXV 50 60 300W T X XA 250V to 10 EXPANSION o HE og 965 O o6 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Gy AC 52 INPUT 4 Current Outputs optional Analog Voltage Inputs optional Figure 7 18 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins Note The pin numbers on the connector do not match the pin numbers on the terminal boards Refer to Table 2 2 Table 2 3 and Table 2 4 for information on the pin to terminal board relationship A Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Analog Output Calibration Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 o I INIo A AJ N o INI oI A N a o Ground 4 8 11 14 Analog Outp Ut Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter p reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than Calibration one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Also refer to Analog Output Calibration on page 3 110 Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to
7. sss 3 102 Service VIER oeste dye aia 3 103 DSO RD AMICON oceano Leon ete aco uS eite 3 104 Show User Zero sss aded tl 3 105 Show User Span ecoute tail deccm Ud eius 3 105 Pressure Calibrations ren ens o echo e tcd 3 105 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual xi Contents Calibrate Pressure ZERO aestate dade tutes Gaeta a 3 106 Calibrate Pressure Span iii iii 3 106 Set Default Pressure Calibration iii 3 107 O Sensor Calibration octingentos td 3 107 Calibrate O Sensor Zero Electrochemical O Sensor 3 108 Calibrate O Sensor Span Electrochemical O Sensor 3 108 Calibrate O Sensor Zero Paramagnetic O Sensor 3 108 Calibrate O Sensor Span Paramagnetic O2 Sensor 3 109 Restore Oz Calibration Defaults erret 3 109 Preamp Board Calibration tarta tdi 3 109 Source Temperature Calibration duda 3 110 Analog Output Calibration iden as ates 3 110 Analog Output Calibrate Zero cioe oth eas ee 3 111 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale 3 111 Lock Analog QUEDUts c estan eid dtes 3 112 Analog Out Lock Type eerte eti tate iura tla 3 112 Set Analog Lock Percenpusu oed umen doute 3 113 Analog Input CABbIMGIOD arde 3 114 Analog Input Calibrate Zero o genie 3 114 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scales andas 3 115 Setup Run Screens iii ii 3 115 Edit Run ermano it 3 116 Edit tl AS 3 116 Shab lc A ner EPO ope NN SPT RC EL dL LE 3 117 INumb
8. Alarm Dewpoint Problem with external sampling system such as a chiller or other water removal device Check external sampling system and service as necessary Alarm Pressure Leak or loss of flow Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm replace with pump repair kit if necessary Refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check that capillary is properly installed and silastic tubing is in good shape Replace if necessary Check flow system for leaks Remove line from pressure transducer The pressure reading should go to ambient Calibrate pressure transducer if necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Probe Filter Temp Probe filter has over heated or heater has failed Check set point against probe filter temp reported in Model 60i Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual Alarm Message Possible Cause Action System alarm Temperature sensor failed System menu Replace temperature sensor Alarm Probe Barrel System alarm Probe barrel has over heated or heater has failed Temperature sensor failed Check set point against probe barrel temp reported in System menu Replace temperature sensor Alarm Blowback Pressure System alarm Pressure sensor failed Compressor failed Pressure loss Replace pressure sensor Check blowback air source Check filter a
9. The Event Type screen is used to set the event type to zero span span NOx or purge To change an event type from the current type position the cursor at the Event Type press to open the Set Event Type screen press _ f to scroll between zero span span NO and purge and press to save the selection Dd Py Pap DH DEB YU ir A The Edit Event screen contents will change depending on which event type is selected The following Edit Event screens show the menu selections for the zero span span NOx and purge event types Table 3 5 provides a description of the associated screens Note that the zero cylinder is already assigned via the Calibration Setup menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Zero Event Type Menu Note that the zero cylinder is already assigned previously in the Select Zero Cylinder screen EH DHOBM Pin Piri i Span Event Type Menu Span NOx Event Type Menu EH DHOBM PLI Purge Event Type Menu EN DHOBM LP Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Calibration Menu Set Autocal Schedule Table 3 5 Edit Event Screens Menu Description Choice Event Type Used to change the event type to Zero Span Span NOx or Purge Span Used to change the span cylinder for span type events Cylinder Zero Used to specify the zero channel as O2 IR or All Channel Delay Used to configure the delay f
10. Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 121 Operation Service Menu Table 3 22 Data in Run Screen Non Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Digin Status Indicates status of raw digital inputs Units Indicates the types of units ppm mg m 96 of the available gases Start Screen The Start Screen screen is used to select which of the five custom Run screens will be displayed upon instrument start up e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Setup Run Screens Start Screen Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly In the Main Menu choose Service Display Pixel Test THEY Pit P PH CLIE Auli I PUREE EE Adjust Peak Offset The Adjust Peak Offset screen is used to center the peaks in the measurement window to optimize data capture Reducing window delay increases peak offset An ideal peak offset is 1 to 1 Adjust the Window Delay value and watch for a Peak Offset reading of 1 e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Adjust Peak Offset 3 122 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu I5RHZE pg perm ELE bias ini pi cER USE CIL i5 RO 4 PUPA i iNi i Raw Data Display The Raw Data Display screen is used to view the types of data shown in the
11. 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 21 Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Replacement 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Support Bracket Mounting Studs Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Figure 7 20 Replacing the 0 Expansion Board Optional Standoffs 2 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 21 Rear Panel Board Connectors 7 48 Model 60i Instruction Manual armo Fisher Scientific Digital Output Board Replacement A Motherboard Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 19 Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassi
12. Analog Input The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the eight raw analog Voltages input voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages a prin p Lira PR ic Py AG Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs If nothing is connected to an input the internal electronics will pull the voltage up to high and the input will read 1 If a device is connected to an input the user configures whether the relay is normally open or normally closed This will dictate whether the input is brought to high 1 or to ground 0 to call for an action Also refer to Digital Input Settings on page 3 71 e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Diagnostics Menu DH DHDM 2o a E S a EA Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the ten digital outputs and eight solenoid outputs and allows toggling of the state to either On 1 or Off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States Press to toggle the relay state open and closed PRPUPMPO Test Analog Outp uts The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choice
13. B 54 Model 60i Instruction Manual span coef gas This command reports the span coefficient for the selected gas The following example reports the span coefficient for CO is 1 012 Send span coef co Receive span coef co 1 012 set span coef gas This command sets the span coefficient for the selected gas The following example reports the span coefficient for NO is set to 1 023 Send set span coef no 1 023 Receive set span coef no 1 023 ok sys alarm bb pres min sys alarm bb pres max These commands report the system alarm blowback pressure minimum and maximum value current settings Send sys alarm blowback pressure min Receive sys alarm blowback pressure min 30 psi set sys alarm bb pres min value set sys alarm bb pres max value These commands set the system alarm blowback pressure minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the alarm pressure limits The example that follows sets the system alarm blowback pressure maximum value to 80 psi Alarm limit range is 30 85 psi Send set sys alarm blowback pressure max 80 Receive set sys alarm blowback pressure max 80 ok sys alarm umb 1 temp min sys alarm umb 1 temp max These commands report the system umbilical temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings for umbilical 1 in degrees C The sys alarm umb 2 temp command functions in the same manner Send sys alarm umb 1 temp min Receive sys alarm umb 1 temp m
14. Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board New Version Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label AC IN Reference Designator J1 Pin Signal Description AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground BENCH TEMP J2 Bench Temperature Thermistor Ground 24V IN J4 24V Ground DATA J5 Ground RS485 RS485 OPT PKUP J6 wo nh Optical Pickup Input Ground Optical Pickup Source Drive SH TEMP J7 IR Source Housing Temperature Thermistor Ground IR SRC J8 18V for IR source Ground MOT DRV J9 gt Co N Motor Drive Voltage 1 Motor Drive Voltage 2 Motor Drive Voltage 3 Motor Drive Voltage 4 PREAMP cO OO N on A CO N RS485 RS485 Optical Pickup SPI Data Out SPI CLK SPI CS 15V 5V Ground Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 60i Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Signal Description 15V Detector Thermistor Ground PRES FP Co N Chamber Pressure Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V CAL FLOW SW gt Cal Flow Sensor Input Ground FLOW c1 FP CO N Sample Flow Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V Ground 02 SENS EC gt wo N 02 Sensor Electrochemical Input Ground 02 SENS PM cO a N O 0 A CO N gt gt
15. screws B in a criss cross pattern Replace the pin screw s P and tighten to 25 N cm 2 2 lbf in DO NOT overtighten 13 Replace the cover plugs over the pin screws P 14 Reinstall the pump into the instrument making sure the tubing and fittings are as previously sketched in Step 2 15 Perform the Pump Test and Internal Leak Test procedure described in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 5 9 Safety Precautions Firmware Diagnostic Information Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems The Service Level mode described in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Firmware Diagnostic Information on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on p
16. 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection 5 Using the nut driver remove the standoffs securing the board to the rear panel 6 Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as described previously in this chapter all ranges Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 22 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver Important Note The wheel characterization chip on the interface board contains critical parameters that describe the analyzer s unique hardware set and optical properties If the interface board is replaced the chip must be Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement transferred from the failed board to the new board If the chip is lost or damaged the entire analyzer will need to be returned to a Thermo Fisher Scientific service center to be re tested A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is no
17. 8 Equipment Required Optical pickup Philips screwdriver Allen wrench 5 32 inch Cutting pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the filter wheel motor power cable from the MOT DRV connector on the measurement interface board disconnect the IR source the optical pickup cable and the thermistor cable assembly Cut cable ties as necessary 3 Remove the three motor retaining screws securing the filter wheel motor and wheel assembly to the optical bench Figure 7 8 Be sure to keep the two spacers for these screws and note their location for reinstallation Remove the motor and wheel assembly from the measurement case 4 Remove the two remaining motor retaining screws to remove the housing and optical pickup Keep the spacers for these screws and note their location Figure 7 8 5 Remove the two screws securing the optical pickup assembly to the housing and remove the optical pickup assembly Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing IR Source Replacement IR Source
18. Hardware Partition DC Pump Measurement Interface Board nm m e AS O O QuE Or OF Es Es deett Jo e m Electrochemical 0 Sensor optional Source Temp Paramagnetic O Sensor iff optional not shown Relay Mirror Optical Bench Fan y Thermistor not shown Motor and Wheel Assy 4 CaF2 Window Assy Entrance Mirror Detector Assy Ja Field Mirror 3 Way Cal Valve Cal Pressure Exit Mirror How Transducer Switch Optical Bench Infrared Source Aperture Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 8 1 Hardware Components The optical bench is an airtight chamber that contains the sample gas The bench includes mirrors that cause the infrared light from the infrared source to pass through the sample gas multiple times before reaching the infrared detector The infrared source is a special wire wound resistor operated at high temperature to create infrared radiation Located adjacent to the window the aperture allows a fixed portion of the source energy to pass through Model 60i Instruction Manual 8 3
19. The Series instruments include a built in data logging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs long records and srecs short records Each record can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs can be interleaved For example an srec containing just the current concentration level could be generated every five minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time concentration Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for approximately three months gt 190 000 records e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings S PILQPUPMPO Select SREC LREC The Sel
20. gt gt gt gt o O1 m 99 N Ground 5V NC NC Ground 02 SENSOR Paramagnetic INPUT 02 SENSOR THERMISTOR INPUT NC 5V TO 61i Reset Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin oOo N C wo A CO N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Reset SPI SIMO SPI SIMO SPI CS SPI CS SPI CLK SPI CLK CAL PATH 24V Solenoid Driver 1 CAL OUT 24V Solenoid Driver 2 SPARE 24V Solenoid Driver 3 SPARE2 24V Solenoid Driver 4 FAN FAN ON OFF FAN PWR J21 J22 J23 24V Fused Ground 24V Fused Fan On Off Control 24V Fused Fan PWM Control AMB TEMP J24 Ambient Temperature Thermistor Ground DC PUMP J27 24V Fused Ground Bench Heater 220 VAC J28 oOo N C wo FP CO N AC NEUT Bench Heater AC HOT AC HOT AC NEUT AC HOT AC NEUT AC NEUT AC HOT Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description Bench Heater 110 VAC J29 oOo N C wo A CO N AC HOT Bench Heater AC HOT AC HOT AC HOT AC NEUT AC NEUT AC NEUT AC NEUT Table 6 6 Measurement Interface Board Old Version Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label AC IN Reference Designator J
21. set mode local or set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting where value is either 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode Table B 11 The example that follows shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 If the instrument is set to power up in the local unlocked mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The example that follows sets the instrument to power up in remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values Value Power Up Mode Command 0 Local Unlocked default 1 Remote Locked Mode tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Se
22. the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code 0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again INO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important h
23. 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 13 Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 13 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 13 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1 V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this Undefined but may report Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in Oxff7f
24. 10suog 9 lt 0L lt 09 lt Jamo Juauodwiog lt Seoueqiosqy suue y uoneiueouo suois19A ure104d sbunes BuibBojejeg o1oz eun Bay syun 199195 sionuo DNMAJOS swuejy sonsoubeig SUBS u0ne1queo cardo shun abuey wa s s nuew ure ueaiog uny users 3591 Hes uses dn 13mM0d Figure 3 3 Model 607 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware Thermo Fisher Scientific 3 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 604 This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo EN T eres Run Screen The Run screen displays the current concentration readings The status bar displays the time the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and solenoid valve status if installed Note Time is always displayed in 24 hour format A Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that no parameter changes can be made from gt B A The alarm bell Icon indicates the front panel that an alarm is active The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode The exact layout of the Run screen varies depending on the instrument configuration A typical Run screen is shown in the following illustration The status bar displays the current time 24 hour format al
25. Activates if the analyzer is Do not pressurize in Zero or Span Mode AND Pressure Sensor eU is set for SYSTEM calibraion N Normally Closed th a Normally Open X IAM INM gt lt A AU LLLI Three Way Calibration Valve Activates if the analyzer is in Zero or Span cal Gas Out Fitting Normally Closed Common Mode AND it is set for DIRECT calibration Cap if not in use 2 Way i gt Cal Gas In Fitting Calibration Flow Switch Cap if not in use Figure 1 5 Model 60 Standard Analyzer Flow Schematic 1 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation Flow Switch A To Vent e lt lt y Internal Sample Pump 1 LPM iy va i Exhaust Fitting 3 lt lt i C t to vent T Large ID Vent Line Connect to vent U J 0 018 ID Capillary purple blue O2 Sensor w AEN 0 006 ID Capillary green A Lad E gt gt Sample flow from external pump gt gt i gt e gt Opti Wi ptical Bench Approximately 2 to 3 LPM Cal Shut off Valve Cal Out line carries calibration gas lt Sample In Fitting Do not pressurize Activates if the analyzer is in Zero or Span Mode AND Pressure Sensor A is set for SYSTEM calibraion Normally Closed A N to the sample probe for a System Calibration C
26. Component Description Hardware CaF Window Assembly Entrance Mirror Relay Mirror Field Mirror Exit Mirror Optical Pickup Bench Heater Assembly Bench Thermistor Assembly Filter Wheel Assembly 8 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Located in the side of the bench the window allows IR energy from the source to reach the entrance mirror Reflects the IR energy from the source at a 90 degree angle toward the relay mirror The relay mirror and the field mirror cause IR energy from the source to pass through the sample gas multiple times before it reaches the detector See Relay Mirror described previously The exit mirror directs the residual IR energy to the detector The optical pickup detects the position of the filter wheel provides synchronizing signals for the signal demodulation and provides a method for checking the filter wheel chopper motor speed The bench heater assembly consists of four cartridge heaters that maintain the optical bench at a constant temperature The bench thermistor assembly contains a thermistor that is inserted into the bench which provides temperature feedback to the analyzer to help maintain a constant bench temperature The filter wheel assembly includes the filter wheel chopper and chopper motor Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Wheel Chopper Chopper Motor Source Housing Thermistor Cable Assembly Detector and Pre amplifier Assembly Infrared Detector
27. Detection Display 0 1 ppm 0 0196 0 1 ppm 0 1 ppm 0 1 ppm 0 196 0 0196 Resolution Zero Drift 24 1 0 ppm 0 1596 lt 1 2 ppm 1 0 ppm 0 5 ppm 0 296 0 196 Hours Span Drift 196 196 196 196 196 0 296 0 196 24 Hours of Span Response 70 Sec 70 Sec 70 Sec 70 Sec 70 Sec 60 45 Sec 60 45 Sec Time 1 The 60i has one physical measurement range User defined ranges can be used to scale analog outputs as needed for specific installations 2 Specification applies to concentrations equal to or greater than 20 ppm for S0 40 ppm for CO NO NO and 1 for CO 3 A one time multipoint calibration can be used to increase accuracy and may be required for measurement ranges smaller than full scale 4 Zero noise is defined as the standard deviation of the signal measured over 30 minutes using a 120 second averaging time 5 Limit of detection is defined as equal to or greater than 2 standard deviations of the noise while sampling contaminant free zero gas 6 Based on operation at stable temperature and pressure 7 Measured from first observed change in signal to 9096 of final reading Specifications for oxygen measurement are presented as electrochemical sensor EC and paramagnetic sensor PM and are stated in concentration units Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 1 11 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Model 607 includes the following recommendations and
28. E 8 xx Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 60 Design Specifications ssssssss 1 10 Table 1 2 Model 60 Performance Specifications ss 1 11 Table 2 1 Connecting Gas Lines a xen aca tonat a eee ehe ee 2 3 Table 2 2 Default Analog Voltage Outputs and Digital Inputs Left Side 37 Pin BIAIS AAA O NI EU TERRI EON ERE 2 6 Table 2 3 Digital Outputs Right Side 37 Pin Connector 2 Table 2 4 Optional Analog Current Outputs and Analog Voltage Inputs 1 0 Expansion Board 25 Pin Connector pri de Et entend 2 8 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons s sss 3 3 Table 3 2 Types of Selections Available for Select Units Menu Items 3 19 Table 3 3 Calibration Menu Top Level Selections s 3 23 Table 3 4 Cylinder Definition Example sssssssssss 3 31 Table 3 5 Edit Event Screens 3 38 Table 3 6 Front Panel Pushbutton Usage to Set Date and Time 3 39 Table 3 7 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Concentrations 3 50 Table 3 8 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Other Measurements 3 51 Table 3 9 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Analog Inputs 3 52 Table 3 10 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Non Measurements 3 52 Table 3
29. In these systems the PLC or data logger should turn on the desired calibration gas and allow the system to fully stabilize Note The 60 Cal In and Cal Out bulkheads should be capped and the internal valves should be disabled via Main Menu gt Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration gt Disable Cal Valves A Once the reading is stable the PLC or data logger issues a calibration command to the 60 and the analyzer will immediately calculate a new zero offset or span factor based on the specific command Available commands are Set O zero offset Set O span factor Set IR zero offsets Set cylinder 1 span factors Set cylinder 6 span factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibrating NO N02 and NOx with an Ozonator Note that the span channels associated with a cylinder and the span concentrations must have been previously entered in the cylinder definition table Nitrogen oxides NOx are the sum of nitric oxide NO and nitrogen Ca ibrating NO dioxide NO2 Because the ratio of NO to NO in a mixture can be NO and NOx unstable the total NOx concentration is sometimes considered more important than the individual NO and NO measurements NOx NO NO The Model 60 reports NOx by measuring NO and NO on separate channels and adding the two results In order to get accurate NOx measurements both the NO and the NO channel must be calibrated with an Ozonator If NO and NO span gases a
30. Model 607 Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100533 00 Motherboard 101491 31 Processor Board 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 100539 00 Digital Output Board 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel LCD Display 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 106552 00 Optical Pickup with Cable 105445 00 CaF2 Window Assembly 7194 Field Mirror 7195 Entrance Mirror 7193 Relay Mirror 7196 Exit Mirror 105383 00 Motor and Wheel Assembly for reference only not field replaceable not for sale 7361 I R Source 101427 00 Filter Wheel Motor 105382 00 Filter Wheel for reference only not field replaceable not for sale 106551 00 Detector Board Assembly 107631 00 2 Way Cal Out Valve Cable Assembly 106458 00 3 way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Assembly for use without 0 sensors 106458 01 3 way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Assembly used wth either O sensor 106457 00 Sample Flow Switch 101023 00 Pressure Transducer 7336 Capillary purple blue 1 1 8 x 018 ID Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 106491 00 DC Pump Assembly for use without 02 sensors 106491 01 DC Pump Assembly used with either O Sensor 102701 00 Teflon Particulate Filter Kit with Filter Element optional 4320 Filter Element Replacement Package of 25 Filters opt
31. Receive set sys probe filter set temp 175 ok Model 60 Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Hardware Configuration B 36 Model 60i Instruction Manual sys umb 1 set temp This command reports the set temperature for umbilical zone 1 The following example reports the umbilical zone 1 set temperature is 165 degrees C The sys umb 2 set temp command performs the same function for sys umbilical 2 Send Sys umb 1 set temp Receive Sys umb 1 set temp 165 000 deg C set sys umb 1 set temp value This command defines the set temperature for umbilical zone 1 to value where value is a floating point number representing temperature in degrees C The following example defines the set temperature for umbilical zone 1 to 165 degrees C Send set sys umb 1 set temp 165 Receive set sys umb 1 set temp 165 ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 5096 according to Table B 7 Send contrast Receive contrast 10 505 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 7 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 10 Receive set contrast 10 ok Table B 7 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 1 596 1096 1596 2096 2596 3096 35 yio ao SI wo rm Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Pro
32. Sensor electrochemical O sensor on zero air only after a sensor replacement e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt O2 Sensor Calibration gt Zero Calibrate 0 Sensor Span The Calibrate O Sensor Span screen is used to view and calibrate the Electrochemical 0 electrochemical O sensor on span gas only after a sensor replacement Sensor Note The reading should be greater than 9 mV for a new oxygen sensor A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt O Sensor Calibration gt Span Calibrate 0 Sensor Zero The Calibrate O Sensor Zero screen is used to view and calibrate the Paramagnetic 0 Sensor paramagnetic O sensor on zero air only after a sensor replacement The zero adjustment potentiometer is located on the paramagnetic O sensor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt O2 Sensor Calibration gt Zero 3 108 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu I5RHZE CH TE EH mid Prid YU Lir Calibrate 0 Sensor Span The Calibrate O Sensor Span screen is used to view and calibrate the Paramagnetic 0 Sensor paramagnetic O sensor on span gas only after a sensor replacement The span adjustment potentiometer is located on the paramagnetic O sensor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt O2 Sensor Calibration gt Span Restore 0 Calibration The Restore Default Cal screen is used to reset the calibration values to Defaults factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu ch
33. The Calibrate Source Temp screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize use and f J 4 to enter the known temperature and press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the ambient temperature thermistor assembly if the instrument is equipped with an internal ambient temperature thermistor Equipment Required Thermistor assembly Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the connector latch and pull the ambient thermistor assembly from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board Note which connector it is for re installation 3 Insert the new internal thermistor assembly into the connector Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Internal Temperature Calibration 7 46 Internal Temperature Calibration Model 60 Instruction
34. Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The following example sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok set cal single gas span This command triggers a single gas span for the currently selected cylinder To select a cylinder to be spanned you can use the set span cylinder command or use digital inputs Because this is a single gas the cylinder should be defined as containing a single gas Send set cal single gas span Receive set cal single gas span ok cal status This command reports the flags for span calculation failure The value reported is a one byte 8 bit number represente
35. Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Note The Service Level mode should be turned Off when not in use as it prevents remote operation A The Setup Level menu system provides access to all of the operatin P y P P g parameters that are used in initial setup and programming of automated functions The Operator Level menu provides a simpler interface that allows the instrument to run and be calibrated but restricts access to critical parameters and instrument configuration menus Refer to Figure 3 3 for more details e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Service Access Level Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and Menu functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are displayed only if the optional I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Diagnostics Menu Program Versions Voltages Motherboard Voltages 3 86 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Program Versions screen read only shows the version numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions o Pi The Voltages menu displays th
36. ZERO IR 1 Note When ZERO O2 and ZERO IR are set to the same cylinder the ZERO ALL event may be used A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 37 Calibration Completed Worksheet Example 3 Select O2 Span Parameter Cylinder 02 Span 2 4 Calibration Flow Path select one O Direct 5 Define Events V System Note Events require external hardware such as the 617oz Calibrator A Event Event Event Delay Duration Notes Type Sub type min min 1 Zeo R 6 10 ee 2 Span CYL2 j 4 Span CO2 O2 3 span CYLs le 4 a ee 4 Zero O2 e 4 Zero O2 5 Span CYL4 e 4 Span SO2 6 Span Cyl 5 e 4 Span NO2 7 Span CYLG j 4 Span NO Check zero again 8 Zero IR e 10 and flush cal lines meee 070 LP 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 38 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 6 Setup Auto Cal Sequence Calibration Completed Worksheet Example Note Events require external hardware such as the 61 0z Calibrator A Auto Cal Sequence Event Order Defined Event 1 4 Zero Oz 2 1 Zero IR 3 5 Span SO E 7 Span NO 5 9 Purge 1 6 7 8 9 10 Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 39 Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the p
37. as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the instrument and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS commands listed that follows For details of the Model 607 MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 2 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Addresses Supported on page C 9 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits 1 or 2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 60 Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header
38. din channel This command reports the action assigned to input channel and the corresponding active state The following example reports input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 35 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions The following example sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of general alarm Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding state The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 ope
39. eese D 3 Geysitech Commands 5c eques ds D 3 Instrument Control Command ST coser eotet aee near tb Lesbo trc D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command D 6 Operating and Error Status ios ete d ecd cede ie eds D 7 Appendix E Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60 Multi Gas Analyzer E 1 A RP SOD ORT E 1 Connecting a DCS PLC to the Model 00 ae E 1 Establishing CobtintnicationS slut iii E 3 Check Readings UO ti Ros E 3 is IE A AA E 4 Trigger BES aia E 6 Cubo RS E 7 xviii Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Example of Simple Single Beam NDIR ss 1 2 Figure 1 2 Absorbance Spectra of Carbon Monoxide and Carbon Dioxide 1 4 Figure 1 3 Example of Spinning Optical Filter Wheel NDIR 1 5 Figure 1 4 Example of an Optional Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor 1 6 Figure 1 5 Model 60 Standard Analyzer Flow Schematic 1 8 Figure 1 6 Model 60 Flow Schematic with Oz Sensor Option 1 9 Figure 2 1 Model 60 Rear Panel Gas Connections 0 0 00 cece 2 2 Figure 2 2 Atmospheric Bypass Plumbing 2 3 Figure 2 3 Rear Panel Connectors sse 2 4 Figure 2 4 Pinouts of Analog Voltage Outputs sssssssss 2 5 Fi
40. note 1 5 5 3 Zero IR NA note 1 5 5 4 Span 0 NA note 1 5 5 5 Span 1 5 5 6 Span 2 5 5 7 Span 3 5 5 8 Span 4 5 5 9 Span 5 5 5 10 Span 6 5 5 11 Purge None 5 5 12 16 User defined 5 5 Note 1 Cylinders used for these events are selected elsewhere in the Calibration Setup menu 4 24 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Define Events Main Menu Y Calibration Y Calibration Setup Y Cal Sequence Setup Y Define Events F Event 1 F Evant 16 y Event Type Channel or Cylinder Delay Duration Y Save Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Use the following procedure to modify the default events or create new calibration events which are used to create a Calibration Sequence as previously described As many as 16 events can be defined 1 From the Main Menu select Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup Define Events 2 Move the cursor to Event 1 and press Ce 3 Press again to select Event Type Set the Event Type to Purge Zero or Span by pressing the or 9 J arrow and then press to save the selection 4 If the event type is Zero set the zero channel to either O2 IR or All If the event type is Span select the span cylinder The composition of the selected cylinder as entered in the cylinder definition table will
41. rit Li A Selecting Check Reset displays the Sequence Status menu for the sequence selected in the previous menu Reset causes the span factors to be changed during calibration Check has no effect on calibration although it is noted in the data logger To toggle the setting between Check and Reset and to save the selection press L 4 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Cal Sequence 1 gt Check Reset EOSGROGUPLIQ O Pi EE EE Selecting Cal Flow Path displays the Set Cal Flow Path menu which is used to select a direct or system flow path for each sequence In a direct calibration the gases are routed directly to the analyzer optical bench bypassing the probe sampling umbilical and sample conditioning system In a system calibration the gases are routed through the system components mentioned previously To toggle the setting between Direct and System flow path press Cr and press to save the selection e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Cal Sequence 1 gt Cal Flow Path Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu ERE RUE nh SL pH DIEM Pria riv c AL did riii d Select Events Selecting Event 1 Event 10 displays the Select Event screen An event is a step in the calibration sequence and may be assigned any event from the list of up to 16 defined events This is used to select whi
42. rlecount ptbre OREL rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows it needs to be turned into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series Screen information is reported using the iscreen command Send screen Receive screen This is an iseries instrument Screen information not available range gas This command reports the current analog output range for the selected gas in ppb Refer to Table B 6 for a list of gas ranges Send range co Receive range co 150000 0000 set range gas range This command sets the analog out range for gas where gas is the selected gas to range where range is a floating point number representing ppb The following example sets the analog out range for CO gas to value ppb Send set range co 150000 Receive set range co 150000 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Table B 6 Gas Ranges Gas Range CO 100to 1000 ppm CO 2to 20 NO 100 to 1000 ppm NO 100 to 1000 ppm 0 25 to 25 S02 200 to 2000 ppm units gas This command reports the display units for the selected gas The following example reports the CO display units are ppm Send units co Receive
43. separated by Send set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 Receive set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 ok baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The following example reports that the current baud rate Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP as On or Off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The example that follows shows that DHCP is On Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables oz and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to On the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and the gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to Off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to On Note When changing the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address
44. spec ecdesia dee Senet 8 14 External Accessory COnnector ss iia 8 14 Optional Equipments cise pace cata watt 9 1 Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor uat bete aret teda steels ug 9 1 Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor usps ius ii drid 9 1 Tefl n Particulate Filter ai 9 2 I O Expansion Board Assembly ie ee orae eret rait 9 2 25 Pin Terminal Board Asco 9 2 Terminal Block and Cable ista deett t b Dr qtto ine 9 2 Cables e 9 2 Montis OPS dd 9 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Appendix A A A M ted tauands A 1 Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands eee B 1 Instrument Identification Number tete te atre etat B 2 Commands annaas e eiat di cea cose CDs ctos CN B 2 Accessing Streaming DA iii e B 3 Entering Unitsan PPB sd ee B 3 Service Level Mode B 3 Commands Uta ies B 4 Measurement ocupa dete A A A a B 10 Alarms n ae a AMI dL D AU M E DM OO B 10 VIIA BOSTIGS MDC LENS B 15 Dataloggers iu pud hada eei tua etf B 16 Elo roi B 25 Keys Display iia eee ati areae a B 31 Measurement Configuration cust oti a B 32 Hardware Configuration usc tti ei te i ade debet B 36 Communications Contar ads B 41 HO Configuratio ltd dias B 47 Record Layout Definition iaa B 57 Format Specifier for ASCII Responses eere B 57 Format Specifier for Binary Responses eene B 57 Formar Specifier for Erec Layos oaa estes B
45. switch is Off and be sure to verify that the local power matches the label on the back of the analyzer WARNING The Model 60 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Use the following procedure to start the instrument 1 Turn the power On and allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize 2 Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times to appropriate settings For more information about instrument parameters see the Operation chapter 3 Before beginning the actual monitoring perform a calibration as described in the Calibration chapter Use the following procedure to shutdown the instrument 1 Connect a clean air source to the SAMPLE connection and allow the instrument to purge pollutants for at least 10 minutes 2 Turn the power Off 3 Cover instrument gas ports when not in use DO NOT e Do not pressurize the analyzer with sample gas e Do not allow liquids to enter the sample port e Do not expose the instrument to vibration or magnetic interference e Do not remove adjust the small circular entrance or exit mirrors in the optical bench Model 60 Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Important Tips DO e Use an external pump with atmospheric bypass dump to deliver the sample gas to the instrument e Filter condition sample stream Sample dew point must be between 2 and 8 C e Operate the
46. time If set to one minute logging this would be at 01 AUG 2007 10 01 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data gt Date Time gt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH pikari MAMA The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records DH vibe PLP Erase Log The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type either all short records or all long records not both When you press to erase the screen displays a confirm to erase message to help prevent accidental erasures e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Erase Log Select Content The Select Content menu allows the operator to select which data fields will be included in each record for the selected record type srec or lrec When this menu is selected the screen displays a list showing the current settings for each of the 32 available fields The available data fields are organized into the following groups Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs and Non Measurements If the I O board is not present Analog Inputs will not be available 3 48 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content To ch
47. you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as the current address A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 8 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 8 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format O1 ok Model 60 Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 44 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table B 8 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 CR 01 NL sum xxxx CR where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to Series Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 Send set host name analyzeroi Receive set host name analyzer01 ok instr name This command reports th
48. 19S 91188 aqold sindino Bojeuy 4907 Pa dx3 o snieis Ausuaju jou geq snes Bejy siopu g euyeg lt dwa 19S 46 I4 9q04d lt 9 1 jouueyg juaung pg veau SeS jujodmag ajdueg juouneeis eed dmesg uonesques 201195 9 1 jeuueyo abeyon lt pg 40 9919q SMeIS ainssaid uoneool v JOWIIN 9 1 Jepur lt lt paeog aveau lt 189 ino Bojeuy Aysuejul jou eurojul UIN Pong BuI6607 lt lt 192410 lt xny UopeJqIEI JWL 391NOS 91nssaJd 10199190 Suib6ojejeg ambyuog 9 1 49pun g lt lt os z euoz 2911IquIN 189 pieog dwieaid qurodmaq youag juajuog iInejog O 19s9y wajs s lt Ko euoz jeoriquin synejeg 195 mold 189 eoJnog lt quajuog WWIWOD lt upny seo sapunAo ON 181129 eqold ueds Mol aides lt seinje1oduio y Sjueuienseajy UoN 2 1 eouanbeg ung lt ON J0MIJ 9QOIH lt lt ouaz lt suuel y 12410 peog ON sinduj Bojeuy aeaeo ON seunje1eduio uojeiqije 4osuas o uue y 2u0 os pieog aveau sjueuienseoy 13410 9 1 49punAo 709 gg eanssaig lt synejeg 19S wuejy 92u09 O preoquayjow lt suonenueouo lt lt lt 29 ueds 09 lt sonsoubeiq ueds uue y 9009 ON seDeyoA Z I leid lt lt XON 9J2AqUeg lt oog s buey Bojeuy jas g uoz e911iquin O419Z lt uuejy 9uo9 ON M4 10193190 juaJuoy 128Jos ueds 0zL os euoz 29111quIN UOHEIQUED a4nssald wuely 940 ON armud 607 osei3 ug 09 ON pueg eqoid ueds sasp moys wuejy 2u02 709 UOISISA ered pe66o7 mai yousg ul of 09 J9yI4 eqoJd lt lt ouaz 19SN MOYS We y 29u02 O2 lt yonpoig lt 0387 0345 199195 lt
49. 20 Power Fail Relay COM 21 Power Fail Relay N O Contact 22 Digital Ground 23 TTL Input 3 24 TTL Input 4 25 TTL Input 6 26 Digital Ground 2 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Digital Ground 33 Analog Voltage 2 34 Analog Voltage 4 35 Analog Ground 36 Analog Voltage 6 37 Analog Ground VOLTAGE TEST J6 1 5V 2 3 3V 15V Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 12 Model 60i Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description 15V SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 3 3V 24V IN 24V Ground RESET PROC Reset Proc Ground DIGITAL 1 0 cO a N on A CO N Ss O 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock EXT RS485 gt a co co N o a E 99 N o gt gt gt gt al gt 99 N RS485 to Rear Panel RS485 to Rear Panel 5V 5V 5V Ground Ground Ground NC NC 24 24 24 24 24 24 MONITOR J17 24V Power Monitor Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 Ground FRONT PANEL J18 1 Ground BD Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal
50. 45 Internal Temperature Calibration sea dedii e ctione 7 46 Fuse Replacement inicia 7 47 I O Expansion Board Replacement tii cad 7 47 Digital Output Board Replacement iii 7 49 Motherboard Replacements quus oe oe bue tenue 7 49 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sss 7 50 Front Panel Board Replacementea a aede io 7 52 LCD Module Replacement intra 7 53 Service Locations done a a 7 54 Component Description ccsscsessssssessssesssssessseeeesseseeatessssteesessesaneateaeens 8 1 A A 8 1 Optical Bcn ei 8 3 Infrared Socia a 8 3 PU a AS 8 3 Cabo Window Aseo 8 4 Entrance MIE Mate rarteaealithessasimed dise da esed us 8 4 Relay MIEOE atari adds 8 4 Field Mito aa aa A dat 8 4 Ext MIOT O 8 4 Optical Picky essa eet pe bb Ode uento 8 4 Benestar Me aped DE 8 4 Bench Thermistor Assembly esu teceiset eeu ttes itt est tuceanesctae 8 4 Filter Wheel Assembly eth irat v e RO MA QU DUM 8 4 Filter Wheel Chopper ia nsi tb delta niet aee dls 8 5 Chopper Motos 8 5 Source Housing Thermistor Cable Assembly 8 5 Detector and Presamplifier Assembly 5e cet etes 8 5 Infrared Defecto unidad tio 8 5 Preamplifier Assembly teet teer t uie tad 8 5 Detector Thermistor eerie be De EVEN PO MIRATUR Do WR Xia id 8 5 Sample Flow Without ct imde icit e Bineri riket 8 5 Oxygen Sensor optional lleida Dni das 8 5 Electrochemical Oxygen Senso ansa i duet iii ais 8 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual xv Cont
51. Alarm Messages 6 4 Model 60 Instruction Manual xxi Tables xxii Model 60 Instruction Manual Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ss 6 10 Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board New Version Connector Pin Descriptions A Mtn 6 15 Table 6 6 Measurement Interface Board Old Version Connector Pin DIO hu es ds el les dd edo 6 18 Table 6 7 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram o o o 6 21 Table 6 8 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 23 Table 6 9 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 24 Table 7 1 Model 607 Replacement Parts sss 7 5 Table 7 2 Model 60i Cables a xcd Geis sade eot sin dad ecw nace Same 7 7 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components ssss 1 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 1 39 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 40 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration 8 13 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration sss 8 14 Mable SV Cable Options e Noes e e le cs tear 9 3 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables 9 3 Table 9 3 Mounting Options o ococoncicconiccocincononcnccnrnconrnccnrnncnrnccnrnocnrnccnrnncnnos 9 4 Table B 1 Error Response Messages
52. Begins final calculations of span factors B 26 span coef Reports sets span coefficient of specified gas B 54 span conc Reports sets the span concentrations of gases in cylinder 1 B 25 6 span cylinder Reports sets the cylinder used for spanning B 25 Sr Reports last short record stored B 19 srec Reports maximum number of short records B 19 srec format Reports sets output format for short records ASCII or binary B 20 srec layout Reports current layout of short record data B 23 srec mem size Reports maximum number of short records B 21 srec per Reports sets short record logging period B 21 stream per Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data B 24 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 24 sys alarm bb pres Reports sets the system alarm blowback pressure maximum B 54 max settings sys alarm bb pres Reports sets the system alarm blowback pressure minimum B 54 min settings sys alarm probe Reports sets the system probe barrel temp alarm max value B 14 barrel temp max sys alarm probe Reports sets the system probe barrel temp alarm min value B 14 barrel temp min sys alarm probe Reports sets the system probe filter temp alarm max value B 14 filter temp max sys alarm probe Reports sets the system probe filter temp alarm min value B 14 filter temp min sys alarm umb 1 Reports sets the system umbilical temperature alarm max B 54 temp max value for umbilical 1 sys alarm umb 1 Reports sets the system umbilical temperat
53. Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Remove the cover 2 Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg 3 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Pressure Calibration gt and press The Pressure Sensor Cal screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen press to select Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears 5 Wait at least 30 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize then press to save the zero pressure value 6 Slowly relieve the vacuum and disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer 7 Press W to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal screen 8 At the Pressure Sensor Cal screen press to select Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears Thermo Fisher Scientific 3 Way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing 3 Way Cal Sole
54. Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems When planning the calibration system note that it may be possible to reduce the number of span cylinders by using blended standards that combine multiple span gases in one cylinder As discussed previously the Model 60 firmware allows the operator to define up to six different calibration cylinders and enter the concentration of each component in each cylinder In some cases use of blended cylinders may reduce operating costs however the operator should be aware that span adjustments made with blended cylinders do not correct for interferences as efficiently as span adjustments made with individual span gases Note If multi component cylinders will be used be aware that NO cannot be mixed with SO and that NO cannot be mixed with air A scientific gas supplier can usually provide additional guidance on what gases can be Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Regulators Gas Delivery System Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required mixed at specific concentrations the stability of various span gases and the effect of using nitrogen versus air as the balance A The regulators used to control delivery pressure of the span gases should be two stage high purity grade with a non reactive diaphragm and internal parts Delivery pressure capabilities of the regulators should be selected to match the requirements of other components such as the flow restrictors Scientific
55. Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Level 7 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Access Level The Set Access Level screen appears 2 Press Jor Y J as appropriate to toggle to Service then press to save the selection 3 Press W gt W to return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Replacement Parts Thermo Fisher Scientific List Servicing Replacement Parts List Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 60 and Table 7 2 lists the cable assemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the component location Note Consumables including but not limited to O sensors lamps fuses and bulbs are expressly excluded from the Thermo Fisher Scientific warranty You may purchase consumable items from Thermo Fisher Scientific by calling our customer service department at 1 866 282 0430 A Table 7 1
56. LCD Module Screws 4 Front Panel Board Bottom Support Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 23 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Service Locations Service Locations 7 54 Model 60i Instruction Manual Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the module Use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Tu
57. LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltagel 45V Ground cO OO nN 0 0 CO DN gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a m 99 N Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input N N N N O Keypad Row 1 Input N 99 Keypad Row 4 Input N HA Keypad Row 3 Input N a Keypad Col 2 Select N o Keypad Col 1 Select N N Keypad Col 4 Select N co Keypad Col 3 Select N co Ground a o Ground 99 Ground a N Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin wo C2 BR 0 Signal Description 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A PTA cO O N on A CO N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS485 B gt cO aoa N on A CO N NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PJ1 CO N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR PJ2 gt CO N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC INTF BD 6 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual PJ3 AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific
58. LP Enabled The Enabled screen is used to toggle the selected custom Run screen On and Off When a Run screen is On it will be displayed when using ft to scroll through the available Run screen displays When a Run screen is Off it will be skipped when scrolling through the Run screen displays For example if Run screens 2 and 3 are set to Off scrolling down through the available Run screen displays will display only Run screens 1 4 and 5 Note You cannot scroll through Run screens when a menu screen is displayed A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen gt Enabled DERMIIE a TOS DH DEM PPP L Evi Lim PLP PRE Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 117 Operation Service Menu Number of Items Item Number Concentrations 3 118 Model 60i Instruction Manual The Number of Items menu selection is used to set the number of instrument readings to display on the custom Run screen Figure 3 5 A maximum of 10 items can be displayed on a Run screen A Run screen configured for 5 items or less displays the items in the large font a Run screen with 6 10 items displays the items in the small font e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen Number of Items The Item number menu selection is used to assign a selected parameter to a position in the Run screen display list Item 1 is displayed at the top of the l
59. Manual 4 Perform an internal temperature calibration as noted in the next section Internal Temperature Calibration Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient temperature thermistor for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10 kQ 1 resistor Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermometer to the thermistor which is plugged into the measurement interface board Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10 kQ at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10 kQ resistor to the thermistor input AMB TEMP on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A one C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu choose Service Internal Temp Calibration The Calibrate Internal Temp screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Access
60. Menu Non Alarm The Non Alarm status screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument state action for the selected relay The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument are brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH pikor PLP i Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action If nothing is connected to the digital input pin the state sh
61. Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 12 Solenoid Drive Output 1 13 Solenoid Drive Output 2 14 Solenoid Drive Output 3 15 Solenoid Drive Output 4 16 Solenoid Drive Output 5 17 Solenoid Drive Output 6 18 Solenoid Drive Output 7 19 Solenoid Drive Output 8 20 Relay 1 Contact b 21 Relay 2 Contact b 22 Relay 3 Contact b 23 Relay 4 Contact b 24 Relay 5 Contact b 25 Relay 6 Contact b 26 Relay 7 Contact b 2 Relay 8 Contact b 28 Relay 9 Contact b 29 Relay 10 Contact b 30 24V 31 24V 32 24V 33 24V 34 24V 35 24V 36 24V 37 24V Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 25 Troubleshooting Service Locations Service Locations For additional assistance worldwide service is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Toll Free U S only 1 866 282 0430 U S Latin America and Canada 1 508 520 0430 Europe 43176 579 5555 China 86 10 8419 3588 Asia Pacific 91 22 27781102 6 26 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 60 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced For fault locatio
62. NO SO The following example lists the points in the multipoint linearization table for CO Send mp table co Receive mp table co Measured Actual 300 0 300 5 310 0 311 2 0 0 0 0 O QO OLDO O OOoo0000 OOoo0000 OOoo0000 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 30 Model 60i Instruction Manual mp lin gasname This command reports whether the specified gasname is enabled for linearization or disabled where gasname is the name of the selected gas CO CO2 NO NO SO2 The example that follows shows that CO is enabled for linearization Send mp lin co Receive mp lin co enabled set mp lin gasname enabledisable enabledisable 0 disable 1 enable This command enables disables linearization for gasname where gasname is the specified gas CO CO NO NO SO and enabledisable enables linearization 1 or disables linearization 0 The following example sets CO to disabled 0 Send set mp lin co 0 Receive set mp lin co 0 ok mp points gasname This command reports the number of points in the multipoint linearization table used for linearization for the specified gasname where gasname is the name of the selected gas CO CO2 NO NO SO2 The following example reports that NO has four points in the linearization table Send mp points NO Receive mp points NO 4 set mp points gasname ofpoints This command sets the number of points in the multipoin
63. Perform the the Preamp Board Calibration procedure on page 7 16 7 Recalibrate the analyzer Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing IR Source Replacement Thermistor Cable Assy IR Source Cover Cover Screws 2 Clamp Screws 2 IR Source p uw n Figure 7 9 Replacing the IR Source Window Source Housing Figure 7 10 Cleaning the IR Source Window 7 24 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing DC Pump Replacement DC Pump Use the following procedure to replace the DC pump Figure 7 11 To rebuild the pump refer to the DC Pump Rebuilding procedure in the Replaceme nt Preventive Maintenance chapter Equipment Required DC pump Philips screwdriver 2 Cutting pliers f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the pump power connector from the DC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board Cut cable ties as necessary 3 Loosen the inlet and outlet tubing from the pump and the cap
64. Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground RS 485 Connection The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the RS 485 DB9 connector pin configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 8 13 Component Description 1 0 Components Ethernet Connection External Accessory Connector 8 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port This port is used to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface Thermo Fisher Scientific Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 60 is available with the following options e Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor on page 9 1 e Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor on page 9 1 e Teflon Partic
65. Press gt to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen Ce j up Down The four arrow pushbuttons t y JC land Ce J gt Left Right gt move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions Soft Keys The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The soft keys provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note When assigning menu items to soft keys be sure that you do not unintentionally provide access to functions that would normally not be active at the operator level Refer to Service Access Level in this chapter for a description of the operator level A Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the edit soft key prompt screen will not come up upon
66. Required Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Optical Bench Replacement Optical Bench Replacement 7 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual 10 Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel that connect to the measurement interface board Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from front Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables Re install
67. Scientific service center so that the new wheel can be characterized If the wheel is replaced in the field analytical performance may not meet published specifications Therefore this procedure is just to remove and reinstall the same filter wheel A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the filter wheel motor power cable from the MOT DRV connector on the measurement interface board disconnect the IR source optical pickup cable and the thermistor cable assembly Cut cable ties as necessary 3 Remove the three motor retaining screws securing the filter wheel motor and wheel assembly to the optical bench Figure 7 8 Be sure to keep the two spacers for these screws and note their location for reinstallation Remove the motor and wheel assembly from the measurement case Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Chopper Calibration 7 20 Chopper Calibration Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 Remove the two remaining motor retaining screws to remove the housing Keep the spacers f
68. Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Model 60 Instruction Manual Preventive Maintenance comica 5 1 e e il 5 1 Replacement PAESuauod Gon o cioe UND e 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Case iu outer pite eel teat d dta 5 2 Cleaning the Ops iia ia 5 2 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning ias ic 5 4 Pump Lest and Internal Leak Testi aiii 5 5 DC Pump Rebuilding nai ii 5 6 TroubleshoOHlQ iia 6 1 A sina Sern ere M uaa eee aah Dus T T IMs 6 1 Firmware Diagnostic Informations rana 6 1 Teeubleshooting tides s ton etie onis e ida 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagrams esee tima be ode oo deor diva 6 8 Connector Pin Descriptions dd 6 10 Seryic LOCAS estos utto a ae testam epis EA 6 26 AM A dendi scade A a 7 1 Safety Precautions enire n ON 7 3 Firmware Updates tut ret eed ana EN aai 7 4 Accessing the Service Bbeveluc dosage ou aedi tut o 7 4 Replacement Parts Liste sons isnt feu eti database 7 5 Cable iat eet to id e s m 7 7 External Device Connection Components eee 7 7 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Pa O e sace ea cng catenins 7 8 Optical Bench Replacement a c e p cad eect eo ed 7 10 Bench Heater Assembly Replacement title 7 12 Bench Thermistor Assembly Replacement esses 7 13 Detector Board Assembly Replacement sss 7 14 Preamp Board Calibration tasse dee ttes c a seoc
69. a detecte tea een uie did 3 91 Contact Informations dee ltda 3 91 Alarms Men D 3 92 Concentrato AES o eoe cen camen t qute 3 92 Min and Max Concentration Alarm Limits sss 3 93 Min Trigger Concentrado o 3 94 Other Aras ches rs tede iiti te tecto cte wand insu addet tan 3 94 Dewy POA s ssec estne iet E resa Fever ARA HAN ee SER DN RE LO a 3 95 rcu EE 3 95 Min and Max Pressure LES iie de ee tpi ats 3 95 Ref PEL IS a iced omes ampie A aC ae 3 96 Bench Temperature ss ni densa 3 96 Min and Max Bench Temperature Limits sss 3 96 Detector Temperate nia 3 97 Min and Max Detector Temperature Limits ssss 3 97 Source Temperature usce edocet te vae ds 3 98 Min and Max Source Temperature Limits esses 3 98 Internal Temper dose idit mcg 3 98 Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits 3 99 System Alain sa edes i trie roue ata erroe V eR ive a enne 3 99 Probe Filter Femperatut su uod he dd cidcid 3 100 Min and Max Probe Filter Temperature Limits 3 100 Probe Barrel Temperatlre x neon oso id tocan es 3 101 Min and Max Probe Barrel Temperature Limits 3 101 Umbilical Temperature Zone Lina 3 101 Min and Max Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 Limits 3 102 Blowback Pressure deo tetra eas t rta eds 3 102 Min and Max Blowback Pressure Limits
70. and solenoid outputs e 120VAC or 220VAC output and thermistor input from the bench heater assembly e Flow and pressure sensor inputs e Filter wheel chopper motor output e Optical pickup input e Pre amp board input Model 60i Instruction Manual 8 9 Component Description Electronics Pre amp Board Assembly Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board 8 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual e Source housing temperature thermistor e Ambient temperature thermistor The pre amp board assembly receives light passing through the sample gas and amplifies the signal from the infrared sensor The preamplifier gain is adjusted by the main processor to bring the signal amplitude within a normal operating range The output of the pre amp board is fed to an analog to digital converter and then to the measurement interface board Wires from the pre amp board apply power to the infrared source The pre amp board assembly is mounted on top of the optical bench The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24VDC supply pin on the connector The I O expansion board connects to the
71. argument Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Level mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command list scr instead of the correct command list scr 1 Send list scr Receive list scr bad cmd Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response Description bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command cant wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in Service Level mode feature not enabled 1 0 expansion board is not detected flags no alarm active No measurement alarms are active The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time ins
72. attracted to a magnetic field Other gases that are likely to be present at a significant concentration level are Model 60 Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Teflon Particulate Filter Teflon Particulate Filter I O Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Te rminal Board Assembly Terminal Bloc k and Cable Kits 9 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual Cables diamagnetic and will be slightly repelled by or will have no significant interaction with these fields A 5 10 micron pore size two inch diameter Teflon element is available for the Model 607 This filter should be installed just prior to the SAMPLE bulkhead When using a filter all calibrations and span checks must be performed through the filter The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components in the Servicing chapter The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for ei
73. bias In a direct calibration the gases are routed directly to the analyzer optical bench bypassing the probe sampling umbilical and sample conditioning system The gas routing valves are controlled by the analyzer firmware and are accessed through the Calibration Setup menu If the internal calibration plumbing is not being used Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 the bulkheads should be capped and the solenoid valves should be disabled using the configuration table that is accessed through the Diagnostics menu The Model 61 Multi Gas Calibrator sold separately may be used to control the application of calibration gases to the 607 The 61 models accept up to five calibration gases plus zero air The 61 0z also includes an ozone generator that mixes NO calibration gas with ozone O3 to generate NO NO is used to span the NO channel when a stable source of NO is not readily available For more information about the 617 refer to the Multi Gas System Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 61i Flow Control Calibration Gas Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Rate Calibration Equipment Required If the Model 61 calibration system is being used to control and deliver calibration gases the switching of zero and span cylinders and activation of the ozone generator for NO calibration will be automatically controlled by the analyzer firmware If the Model 61 is not being used the calibration gases can be controlled manually or wi
74. bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s Alarm Information The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Translation Table Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Selection Table Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual B 59 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Button Designator Examples B 60 Model 60i Instruction Manual Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T L s Or NC B Indi
75. choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Bench Min and Max Bench The Min and Max Bench Temperature alarm limit screens are used to Temperature Limits change the minimum and maximum bench temperature alarm limits The 3 96 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Minimum and Maximum Bench Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Bench gt Min or Max CREE CRA Pa TCH gy mpi Detector Temperature The Detector Temperature screen displays the current detector temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits The detector temperature is regulated at 48 C Acceptable alarm limits range from 46 to 49 C If the detector temperature reading is outside the set limits an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Detector Min and Max Detector The Min and Max Detector Temperature alarm limit screens are used to Temperature Limits change the minimum and maximum detector temperature alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Detector Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Detector gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 97 Operation Alarms Menu Source Temperature The Source Temperature screen
76. contaminant free zero gas followed by one or more span gases that contain the pollutants of interest at known concentrations While sampling the zero gas the instrument output is adjusted to read zero and while sampling span gas the instrument output is adjusted to read the correct span concentration For a base model analyzer that measures only one gas a complete calibration can be achieved using a zero gas and a single span component As more measurement channels are added additional span gases are required The additional span gases can be supplied as individual cylinders in which case the span adjustments are made one gas at a time or the span gases can be supplied as a blended mixture that contains multiple pollutants If span adjustments are made using a blended span mix the span procedure can be accomplished with fewer steps or events which saves time and reduces the number of cylinders required However the operator should be aware that running individual span gases is a more effective procedure because it allows the analyzer to automatically correct for any cross interferences that are detected during calibration Because calibration of a multi channel analyzer is a multi step procedure the 60 firmware provides features that allow the operator to automate the calibration process The system design is based on the concept that the analyzer will be connected to a gas delivery system that includes anywhere from two to six in
77. detector is failing a continuous increase in span factors over time suggests a loss of sensitivity View Reset Span Factors The View Reset Span Factors screen displays the value of the current span factors Span factors are multipliers that are used to fine tune the analyzer s factory set internal calibration After the factory calibration is performed the span factor for each channel is 1 0 Each time a span adjustment is run the span factor for the affected channel is adjusted up or down to force the instrument reading to match the span concentration that was entered in the cylinder definition table For example if the span concentration is 1000 ppm but the factory calibration produces a reading of 900 ppm the analyzer will automatically calculate and apply a span factor of 1 111 to all readings on that channel By tracking changes in the span factor it may be possible to identify problems with the analyzer or calibration system Resetting Span Factors Position the cursor at the desired gas on the View Reset Span Factors screen press Ce to set the span factor to 1 for that gas and press to save the setting Important Note Be sure to press to save the setting otherwise the setting will be lost after a power cycle A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Diagnostics gt View Reset Span Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Calibration Menu 3 44 View
78. displays the current source temperature measured at the source housing and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 55 to 65 C If the temperature reading is outside the set limits an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Source Min and Max Source The Min and Max Source Temperature alarm limit screens are used to Temperature Limits change the minimum and maximum source temperature alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Source Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Source gt Min or Max Internal Temperature The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 70 C If the temperature reading is outside the set limits 3 98 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Internal ERED EH DHOBM Prid Min and Max Internal The Min and Max Internal Temperature alarm limit screens are used to Temperature Limits change the minimum and maximum internal temperature alarm limits Th
79. entering right arrow soft key combinations All items Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Pushbuttons under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A ri Pik Alphanumeric Entry The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters Screen numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Jand gt keys If a character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the Jand keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter Entry Li
80. following screen This data can be used when diagnosing problems e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Raw Data Display Valve Leak Test The Valve Leak Test screen is used to view the pressure and toggle the 2 way solenoid cal out valve and 3 way solenoid cal valve Open and Closed which can be helpful when leak testing the instrument plumbing Place cursor next to the valve and press to toggle it open or closed Exiting this screen automatically closes the valves e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Valve Leak Test CREE Dium PTE PPP L Piel bii i CH np 60 Pump Control The 60i Pump Control Setup screen is used to set the operating state of the Setup analyzer s internal sample pump The pump can be set to Always On Always Off or to Auto whereby the pump will automatically shut off to protect the analyzer if there is a dewpoint alarm i e if the dewpoint exceeds 15 C Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 123 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt 60i Pump Control Setup Dewpoint Span Cal The Dewpoint Span Cal screen is used to span the dewpoint concentration The dewpoint reading on this screen is provided by the 602 To use this screen you must have another dewpoint measuring device to compare with the 60i reading The value provided on this screen affects the dewpoint alarm e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dewpoint Span Cal Multipoint Mu
81. gas suppliers can usually provide assistance in selection of appropriate regulators Although other configurations are possible the calibration gases are typically connected to the 607 using the configuration shown in Figure 4 2 Details of alternate system designs are shown in Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 The design shown in Figure 4 3 is suggested for systems that utilize the Model 61 Calibrator and the configurations shown in Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 5 are suggested for systems that use a third party calibration system The relative advantages and points of concern for each system design are described in the text associated with each diagram Whatever design is selected the operator must be aware of the Model 60 internal plumbing system described below and must take appropriate steps to ensure that the calibration gases and sample are delivered to the analytical system at equal pressures Note that use of the 61 as the calibration system provides greater integration capabilities and allows the calibrator operation to be controlled directly from the analyzer Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Equipment Required USE I I Vent To Probe Cal Line s si ps Atmospheric p CAEN Y From Probe Sample Line Vent Pump Sample Conditioner Model 61 optional Figure 4 2 Model 60i Rear Panel Connections 4 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration
82. ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Replacement Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Replacement 7 32 Model 60i Instruction Manual 2 Disconnect the cal out valve cable from the SAMPLE connector on the measurement interface board Figure 7 14 Cut the cable ties as appropriate 3 Disconnect the tubing from the cal out valve using a 9 16 inch open end wrench then disconnect the cal out valve from the stainless steel fitting 4 To install the 2 way cal out solenoid valve follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the optional electrochemical oxygen sensor Figure 7 13 Equipment Required Electrochemical oxygen sensor Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the electrochemical oxygen sensor cable from the top of the oxygen sensor Figure 7 13 3 Unscrew the electrochemical oxygen sensor and remove it from the fitting 4 Install the new
83. instrument in a climate controlled environment 15 35 C preferred e Set DHCP to Off when changing the IP address If DHCP is On the instrument will respond with Not Settable if DHCP is On For more information on using DHCP see Use DHCP on page 3 65 and the DHCP C link command in the C Link Protocol Commands appendix 2 10 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 5 e System Menu on page 3 9 e Range Units Menu on page 3 18 e Averaging lime on page 3 21 e Calibration Menu on page 3 21 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 45 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 85 e Alarms Menu on page 3 92 e Service Menu on page 3 103 e Password Menu on page 3 129 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus usel t Jand Y J to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons fe el fe Ce
84. ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is On Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 200 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four gt numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Model 60 Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 42 Model 60i Instruction Manual Send set addr ip 192 168 1 200 Receive set addr ip 192 168 1 200 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is On Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 255 0 set addr nm address This command sets the nm address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr nm 255 255 255 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 255 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communication Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 10 209 43 237 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address gt consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive
85. longer response times and prevents the instrument from tracking rapid changes in concentration Ifa specific averaging time is not required by regulations the 120 second averaging time is suggested for routine flue gas monitoring To change the averaging time use the Jand keys and then save the change by pressing 4 e Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time The Calibration menu is used to e Define the composition of span cylinders e Select a cylinder for use in zero adjustment e Select a calibration gas flow path Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Calibration Menu e Schedule automated calibration checks adjustments or probe blowbacks e Perform manual zero and span adjustments In addition the firmware provides access to a calibration diagnostics screen that provides a record of recent calibrations and diagnostic data An overview of the calibration firmware functionality follows Table 3 3 along with a flow chart of the calibration firmware structure Figure 3 4 Note This Operation chapter describes only the menu systems and firmware For a detailed description of calibration procedures and the necessary equipment see the Calibration chapter A Calibration Diagnostics Calibration History View Reset Span Factors View Reset User Zeros View Cal Status Main Menu Calibration Cylinder Gas Calibr
86. lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logged data in memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok erec This command returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The example that follows shows a typical response The format is defined by the current settings of the format and erec format commands For details on erec formatting see Format Specifier for Erec Layout at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the Flags command Send erec Receive erec 09 48 04 06 05 flags 9C040510 co 0 000 4 loco 0 002 4 s r 0 000 los r 0 902 biasv 112 668 500 intt 34 023 cht 47 995 smpfl 0 000 pres 0 000 avgt1 10 avgt2 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging cobkg 0 000 cocoef 1 000 lococoef 1 000 corange 10000000 000 locorange 10000000 000 motor 100 000 erec layout lrec layout srec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the erec lrec srec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s lx f f f f tDL ffff s r pres intensity motor sp field n
87. motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV to10VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA Current outputs may also be configured for a 4 to 20 mA range through the analyzer firmware The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the front panel mounted function key panel and graphics display It serves as a central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs Analog Current Outputs Optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description 1 0 Components External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid
88. optical filter the radiation enters a sample cell containing the gas mixture to be analyzed Depending on the concentration of the target gas in the cell some portion of the infrared energy will be absorbed The radiation that is not absorbed then leaves the cell and impinges on the detector which converts the IR energy to an electrical signal The higher the concentration of target compound in the cell the smaller the electrical signal produced by the detector Chopper Optical Sample Cell Filter S Detector ource a gt gt Y gt E Figure 1 1 Example of Simple Single Beam NDIR 1 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation Since most compounds absorb IR radiation only at specific wavelengths determined by molecular structure it is possible to measure the concentration of one specific component in a mixture For example the absorbance spectra of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide are shown in Figure 1 2 Based on the absorbance spectra shown in these figures the concentration of carbon monoxide CO can be determined by measuring the absorbance of infrared energy at a wavelength of approximately 4 6 micrometers and the concentration of carbon dioxide CO2 can be determined by measuring infrared absorbance at a wavelength of approximately 4 2 micrometers The Model 60 measures the concentration of individual componen
89. pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok copy lrec to sp copy srec to sp copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the lrecs or srecs The following example reports the data treatment for concentratio
90. pikari Pil pii fiini This selection opens a screen that allows the operator to view and change the flow path of calibration gases Based on the selection made in this screen the calibration gases will be introduced directly into the sample stream through the analyzer s internal plumbing direct calibration or they will be routed back to the CAL OUT bulkhead on the rear panel system calibration In a source monitoring application the CAL OUT bulkhead is typically connected to a line that runs to the probe system By running the zero and span gases through the probe it is possible to troubleshoot the entire system plumbing and possible to calibrate out inaccuracies that might result from leaks in the probe sample conditioner or lines Note A selection made here applies only to manual zero and span If using sequences the flow path must be selected within a calibration sequence setup A If a change is made a question mark will appear to the right until the change has been saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Flow Path Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Cal Sequence Setup The Cal Sequence Setup menu is used to define a full calibration sequence A calibration sequence typically consists of a series of a zero adjustments span adjustments and or system purges that are programmed to occur in a fixed order and to extend over a fixed interval In order to p
91. procedure to calibrate the thermistor that measures the temperature at the source housing Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10 kQ 1 resistor Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermometer to the thermistor which is plugged into the measurement interface board Figure 7 19 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10 kQ at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10 kQ resistor to the thermistor input connector on the measurement interface board labelled SH Temp AMB Temp on older models and enter the temperature reading A Thermo Fisher Scientific Ambient Temperature Thermistor Assembly Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ambient Temperature Thermistor Assembly Replacement A one C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Source Temp Calibration
92. record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging TOO EH Bed fo PFib Pibhibd Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the time period in minutes between logged data points for the selected record type srec or lrec The list of choices includes off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging Logging Period Min oO Mihei i Memory Allocation Percent The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of total memory that will be allocated to lrecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation 3 54 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu CHIRHTIC CHET pyte RO ad Cc fear Pria ii vi d ii Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurements All other data points l
93. reports the component power for the system probe barrel is On Send Sys power probe barrel Receive Sys power probe barrel on set sys power probe barrel onoff onoff on off This command turns component power for the system probe barrel On or Off The following example turns On component power for the system probe barrel Send set sys power probe barrel on Receive set sys power probe barrel on ok sys power probe filter This command reports the On or Off status of the component power for the system probe filter The following example reports the component power for the system probe filter is On Send Sys power probe filter Receive Sys power probe filter on set sys power probe filter onoff onoff on off This command turns component power for the system probe filter On or Off The following example turns On component power for the system probe filter Send set sys power probe filter on Receive set sys power probe filter on ok sys power umbilical 1 This command reports the On or Off status of the component power for umbilical 1 The following example reports the component power for the Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration umbilical 1 is Off The sys power umbilical 2 command performs the same function for umbilical 2 Send Sys power umbilical 1 Receive Sys power umbilical 1 off set sys power umbilical 1 onoff onoff
94. temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example that follows reports that the detector temperature alarm minimum value is 47 C Send alarm temp detector min Receive alarm temp detector min 47 deg C set alarm temp detector min value set alarm temp detector max value These commands set the detector temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the detector temperature alarm limits The example that follows sets the detector temperature alarm maximum value to 49 C Send set alarm temp detector max 49 Receive set alarm temp detector max 49 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 12 Model 60i Instruction Manual alarm pressure min alarm pressure max These commands report the alarm pressure minimum and maximum value current settings Send alarm pressure min Receive alarm pressure min 400 mm Hg set alarm pressure min value set alarm pressure max value These commands set the alarm pressure minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the alarm pressure limits The example that follows sets the alarm pressure maximum value to 900 mm Hg Alarm limit range 250 1000 mm Hg Send set alarm pressure max 900 Receive set alarm pressure max 900 ok alarm conc gas min alarm conc gas max These commands report the concentration alarm minimu
95. the analyzer 4 12 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required ureJq Og 1utog weg y eDeis z N Fe dung onjeisueq Josues dis EM Nd7 S 01 USA OL dung ajdwes eurT ojdureg paH y ysmeyxy C L ul ajdwes AE JE 4 Z 19114 Se noe y payeo pedde mo eo X SMA HOMYS Mid SIRINOMB A pereeH peddeo ul jeo WedJ SUMOP pesn INLA JeyiJ uojo L y uedszo zo9 2lPeeu 10 Krejyideo jo aojoya uo Buipuedep jaueg egougd P amp H JozA euy 109 T sd 9g 0 01 ensn eunsseid wes y z f b lt ueds 09 01 payejnba eje saseb uoieiqies Iy p pueuiep Jaz eue y uds ZON 3 peeoxe Anubis o Wang t d m pjojluew 0 suonoeuuoo se uoreJqieo BuisnoH Kjeyeuuixoadde 0 MOJ SIOLIISOL K lt ueds ON eqold BABA o peeu JO uejjideo T uedg ZOS UBBAJIN vaz PIoJiuejy SED uoneJqieo 4 13 Model 60 Instruction Manual Figure 4 5 Model 60 Plumbing to Allow Direct Analyzer Calibration with External Controllers Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required Gas Routing Valve 4 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual In the configuration shown in Figure 4 5 the calibration gas manifold is connected either to the sample line downstream of the sample conditioner or upstream of the conditioner at the junction of the chiller and heated sample line The
96. the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high order end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded Model 60 Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function code Starting Address Quantity of outputs Unit Identifier Response Function code Byte count Output Status Error Response Function code Exception code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte n Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response 0x01 or 0x02 N N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 N N or N 1 0x01 or 0x02 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Re
97. the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the optical bench Figure 7 4 Equipment Required Optical bench assembly Philips screwdriver Flatblade screwdriver Cutting pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Note After removing the optical bench for cleaning or service you must install the same filter wheel and detector A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Optical Bench Replacement Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover Cut cable ties as necessary and disconnect all cables from the measurement interface board that come from the optical bench It is important to note the location of each connector to be sure they are reconnected correctly Cut tubing ties as necessary and disconnect the optical bench tubing Remove the optical bench cover which is attached to the bench with Velcro by lifting up the end closest to the detector assembly first Remove the two screws securing the detector assembly and move the detector assembly out of the way to access t
98. the motor shaft and remove the filter wheel assembly Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Filter Wheel Motor Replacement 6 Separate the filter wheel motor from the source housing window assembly by removing the two slotted fillister head screws that secure the motor to the source housing window assembly Figure 7 8 7 Install the new filter wheel motor by following the previous steps in reverse Note When installing the filter wheel on the motor shaft make sure that the set screw seats on the flat of the motor shaft and then tighten the set screw A 8 Perform the Chopper Calibration procedure that follows 9 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Thermistor Cable Assy First Set of Motor Retaining Screws 3 Filter Wheel Motor Source Housing Window Assembly Housing Second Set of Motor Spacers 4 Retaining Screws 2 Optical Pickup Figure 7 8 Replacing the Filter Wheel Motor 7 18 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Wheel Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Filter Wheel Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the filter wheel assembly Refer to Figure 7 8 Equipment Required Filter wheel assembly Flatblade screwdriver Allen wrenches 5 64 inch 5 32 inch Cutting pliers Important Note The filter wheel replacement should only be performed at a Thermo Fisher
99. this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 10 seconds The analog output assignments and ranges are user selectable via firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 596 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range Bench heaters operate on 220VAC or 110VAC as ordered from the factory A front panel On Off switch controls all power to the instrument The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted function key panel and or over I O connections on the rear panel and sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect
100. to complete the procedure The instrument should now display the correct concentration reading s Note that in some cases it may take several seconds for the concentration reading to change so that it matches the actual span concentration Record the span concentration and the instrument s response as required by the local quality assurance program Repeat the span procedure for each span cylinder As described in these procedures a complete manual calibration of the analyzer is a multi step process that requires the operator to work through several operating screens and may require that the basic zero and span adjustments be repeated for each measurement system and or channel In order to simplify the process the 60 allows the operator to define calibration events and then setup an automated calibration sequence that can be executed with a single command Use the following procedures to define or edit calibration events and establish a calibration sequence Note External hardware such as the 617oz Calibrator or a gas delivery manifold and PLC is required to use the calibration events and sequences features A Thermo Fisher Scientific Define Calibration Sequence 1 and or Calibration Sequence 2 Main Menu Y Calibration Y Calibration Setup Y Cal Sequence Setup y Cal Sequence 1 y Check Reset Y Cal Flow Path Y Event 1 Event 10 Y S
101. units co ppm set units gas value This command sets the display units for gas where gas is the selected gas to value where value is ppm 1g mg or 96 The following example sets the CO display units to ppm Send set units co ppm Receive set units co ppm ok sys bb period This command reports the system blowback period The following example reports the system blowback period is 2 hours Send sys bb period Receive sys bb period 2 hours set sys bb period value This command sets the system blowback period to value where value is the number of seconds The following example sets the system blowback period to 1 hour 3600 seconds Send set sys bb period 3600 Receive set sys bb period 3600 ok sys bb duration This command reports the duration for system blowback in seconds The following example reports the system blowback duration is 10 seconds Model 60 Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 34 Model 60i Instruction Manual Send Sys bb duration Receive Sys bb duration 10 sec set sys bb duration value This command sets the system blowback duration to value where value is the number of seconds The following example sets the system blowback duration to 15 seconds Send set sys bb duration 15 Receive set sys bb duration 15 ok sys power probe barrel This command reports the On or Off status of the component power for the system probe barrel The following example
102. write single coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either On or Off The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested On Off state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of OxFF00 requests the action to be On A value of 0x0000 requests it to be Off All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in Service Level mode A Request Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Model 60 Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Error Response Function code Exception code Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 On Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo 1 Byte 1 B
103. 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E 0 loco 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E 0 loco 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 erec format lrec format srec format These commands report the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for lrecs is ASCII with text according to Table B 4 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 01 set erec format format set lrec format format set srec format format These commands set the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according to Table B 4 The following example sets the lrec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Table B 4 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for l
104. 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt select point gt User Value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Temperature The Temperature Compensation screen provides compensation for any Compensation changes to the instrument s output signal due to internal instrument temperature variations The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Temperature Compensation Pressure The Pressure Compensation screen provides compensation for any changes Compensation the instrument s output signal due to variations in sample pressure The effects of pressure changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined When pressure compensation is On the first line of the pressure compensation screen represents the current sample pressure When pressure compensation is Off the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 760 mm Hg e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pressure Compensation 3 82 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scienti
105. 02 O ppm O 96 O mg m S02 O ppm O 96 CJ mg m Cylinder 3 Balance gas O Air O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units CO J ppm O 96 CJ mg m C02 O ppm O 96 O mg m NO O ppm O 96 O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m 02 O ppm O 96 O mg m S02 O ppm O 96 CJ mg m Cylinder 4 Balance gas OAir O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units CO O ppm O 96 O mg m C02 O ppm O 96 CJ mg m NO O ppm O 96 O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m 02 O ppm O 96 O mg m S02 O ppm O 96 O mg m Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 33 Calibration Calibration Worksheet Cylinder 5 Balance gas DAir O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units CO O ppm O O mg m C02 O ppm O O mg m NO O ppm O O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m 02 O ppm O O mg m S02 O ppm O O mg m Cylinder 6 Balance gas O Air O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units co O ppm O O mg m C02 O ppm O O mg m NO O ppm O O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m 02 O ppm O O mg m S02 O ppm O O mg m 2 Select Zero Cylinders Parameter Cylinder ZERO 02 ZERO IR Note When ZERO O2 and ZERO IR are set to the same cylinder the ZERO ALL event may be used A 4 34 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 3 Select O2 Span Parameter Cylinder 02 Span 4 Calibration Flow Path select one O Direc
106. 09031 00 101688 00 Ambient Thermistor Assembly used with new MIB 109031 00 109389 00 Bench Thermistor Assembly used with new MIB 109031 00 Expendable item not covered by warranty Verify which MIB version old or new before ordering spare parts 7 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable List External Device Connection Components Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Cable List Table 7 2 Model 60i Cables Part Number Description 101349 00 AC Power Cable 115 VAC US 8926 AC Power Cable 220 VAC EU 01036 00 DC Power Supply 24 V Output VAC Motherboard to Measurement Interface Board RS 485 Data Cable AC Power Switch to Motherboard DC Power Supply Status Monitor ojjo ojojojolo S Dx as ow D ER o o 1377 00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board DC Power Supply AC Input to Motherboard AC to Power Switch 104686 00 Paramagnetic 0 Sensor Cable 106456 00 Electrochemical 0 Sensor Cable 106554 00 IR Source to Interface 106564 00 Detector Assembly ADC to Interface 106391 00 DB25 Rear Panel to Interface used with old MIB 105132 00 109031 00 RJ45 Communications to 61 used with new MIB 109031 00 Verify which MIB version old or new before ordering spare parts Table 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an iSerie
107. 1 Pin CO N Signal Description AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC BENCH1 J2 FP Wo N Bench Thermistor Ground AC HOT Bench Heater AC Control 1 AC BENCH2 w N AC HOT Bench Heater AC Control 2 NC 24V IN DATA J4 J5 lt CO N 24V Ground Ground RS485 from Motherboard RS485 from Motherboard OPT PKUP AMB TEMP J6 J7 wo N Optical Pickup Input Ground Optical Pickup Source Drive Source Temperature Thermistor Ground 6 18 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description IR SRC J8 18V for IR source Ground MOT DRV J9 gt WoO N Motor Drive Voltage 1 Motor Drive Voltage 2 Motor Drive Voltage 3 Motor Drive Voltage 4 PREAMP cO OO N oon A CO N RS485 RS485 Optical Pickup SPI Data Out SPI CLK SPI CS 15V 5V Ground 15V Detector Thermistor Ground PRES FP Co N Chamber Pressure Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V CAL FLOW SW FLOW oao FP CO N Cal Flow Sensor Input Ground Sample Flow Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V Ground 02 SENS A 02 SENS B wo N gt 02 Sensor Input A Ground NC NC NC Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 19 Trouble
108. 11 Data in Streaming Records Concentrations 3 62 Table 3 12 Data in Streaming Records Other Measurements 3 63 Table 3 13 Data in Streaming Records Analog Inputs 3 64 Table 3 14 Data in Streaming Records Non Measurements 3 65 Table 3 15 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table 3 17 Table 3 16 Signal Type Group ChOICES o oonooocincccnocininccnnocininccnnocnnnncnnnoso 3 78 Table 3 17 Filters INT interferent sssss 3 104 Table 3 18 Default Run Screen Titles ce ceceeesectesteseeseeseetesteseeseenes 3 117 Table 3 19 Data in Run Screen Concentrations ss 3 119 Table 3 20 Data in Run Screen Other Measurements 3 120 Table 3 21 Data in Run Screen Analog Inputs sss 3 121 Table 3 22 Data in Run Screen Non Measurements 3 122 Table 3 23 Point Table Example sss 3 125 Table 4 1 Zero Gas Contaminant Limits sssssssss 4 4 Table 4 2 Gas Scrubbing Media sse 4 5 Table 4 3 Default Calibration Events 4 24 Table 6 1 Diagnostic Menu Selections sssssssssssss 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide ssssssss 6 3 Table 6 3 Troubleshooting
109. 200 isd O 01 01 lensn eunssejd awes y ueds 09 0 perejnBai ase seseb uolesqies y ueds ZON 6 uedgS ON pojluew 0 suonoeuuoo seb uoneJqi eo Weds ZOS 1914 eyejnoey pejeeH ugBagwN waz Jeureg eqoid pOH BulsnoH qd Figure 4 4 Model 60 Plumbing to Allow System Calibration with External Controllers 4 11 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required In the configuration shown in Figure 4 4 the calibration gas manifold is connected directly to a calibration gas line that runs to the sample probe An optional 3 way valve allows the calibration gases to be introduced to the system just up stream of the sample conditioner chiller The calibration gas manifold is controlled by a third party PLC or data logger that also communicates with the 607 through dedicated I O Ethernet or RS 232 connections The 60 Cal In and Cal Out bulkheads should be capped and the internal valves should be disabled via Main Menu gt Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration gt Disable Cal Valves The Teflon particulate filter is located downstream of the atmospheric pressure vent to reduce flow through the filter element The vent line must have a large ID to minimize risk of developing back pressure Please see documentation provided by the system integrator for additional information regarding plumbing and components that are external to
110. 3 76 Set Minimum and Maximum Value ees 3 76 Choose Signal To Outpt aset ea col it 3 77 Analog Input Confor aio dn iot de easi is 3 78 IBI esl D A iiias 3 79 Juni e CE 3 79 Decimal Placenta 3 80 Number of Table Poltica 3 80 A aca eate ocean desea tes dete aene risu dids 3 81 Moles nim nei e acetal Eua debo ends eee aden A UE 3 81 A O d e 3 81 Temperature Compensation Seded ie ae tox ep E a i Eee M RdnS 3 82 Pressure Compensation auno oves dues dira 3 82 Sereen C oDtiassbor A Lame d ME 3 83 Dat Lie outs e A id 3 83 JinezoHes scies ebat pea eni aie dus 3 84 SERVICE Access EVE lie ate tte i o tara oet oa sae tu SU d felt 3 84 ragnosucs Meninas ideas 3 85 Pr gram Version Scen a a 3 86 phler o nne e a a a a a S 3 86 x Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Motherboard Voltar usage ta edited eese 3 86 Interface Board Voltages cnica pitt hi ect ets 3 87 MO Board Voltages zou eo iret ande iea NR va idus 3 87 T empetatukes a coded irarum aE 3 87 Pressure 2 eed ed netos oto Dou osse dd cimus 3 88 Sample D wpolnt aec pe dee dan dtes 3 88 Ref DACH e avo meats d cafes dede oe at ee 3 88 Analog Input Readings ost laico 3 89 Analog Input Voltages 1 ee er Idea tees 3 89 Digital np iiu oce epa sarete hanip ete tem ee rain 3 89 Relay States andae ne hide a A match R ns 3 90 Test Analog COUEDHES ono ra dec 3 90 Set Analog OUutputsc sci ud oe o ftu eu er dien 3 91 Instrument Configuration in
111. 58 p EE B 58 Valie Stina es ic coi gee M SL A AD ee B 58 Valie SOU ECS cops ioc nce icem vati cies aav cau i Dess ERO Us M cR obe SED B 58 Alarm Information iia B 59 Translation Tablon orasenesti airain Ei B 59 Selecion A n btt R a Ra B 59 Button Design B 60 O B 60 Appendix C MODBUS Protocol scsssssccscssecesssessesneeseesnssnssessnssneesessnssnesnssnsenesanseneenees C 1 Serial Communication Parameters doen e estt cule C 1 TCP Communication Parameters so ssi esee eir dect C 2 Application Data Unit Dehn ition tical pacati t ts C 2 Slave Adria C 2 MBAD Header sitiada diia C 2 Function Codes C 3 Dit a beeen tela ies C 3 TOR GWG alot teo Lec hoe t cac cut C 3 Function Codes sag iius diet trt vedere UD an EUN NONU NR PU NS eR C 3 0x01 0202 Read Coils Read Inputs sis C 3 Model 60i Instruction Manual xvii Contents 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Coll tet tente C 7 MODBUS Addresses Supported aue oed teeth tetro C 9 Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol sss D 1 Serial Communication PArdmieters eon ceci erateie cosi i essai rve sdb e eed D 1 TCP Communication Parameters eee D 2 Instrument Address Sousse sepa ed meters b vod cedi D Se Ae D 2 Abbreviations A des chs oet oC Seed Ck HE D 2 Basic Command Structure essc etse idee tear Qu tno Gate D 2 Block Checksum Characters BCC
112. 6 REFERENCE INTENSITY 97898 NONE 998100 ALARM FLAGS C link 101 amp 102 DEW POINT 1038104 BLOWBACK PRESSURE system only 1058106 PROBE FILTER TEMP system only 1078108 PROBE BARREL TEMP system only 1098110 CHILLER TEMP system only Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported Register Number Variable 1118112 UMBILICAL ZONE 1 TEMP system only 1138114 UMBILICAL ZONE 2 TEMP system only 1158116 CAL STATUS 1178118 FLAGS C link Registers marked with an asterisk are 32 bit unsigned integers or have to be interpreted as 32 bit unsigned integers IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action For example to trigger AOUTS to zero write 1 to coil 101 To see the state of coil 101 issue a read coil 101 A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is a conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 In add
113. 9 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 22 measurements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary B 20 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 23 event delay Reports sets the delay time for the specified event B 27 event duration Reports sets the duration of the specified event B 27 event halt Reports sets event halt control bit used to stop current B 52 running event event param Reports sets the event parameter for the specified event B 27 event run Triggers the selected event B 28 event type Reports sets the type of event B 26 flags Reports 8 hexidecimal digits or flags that represent the B 15 status of system parameters flow Reports flow as OK or low B 53 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 43 gas mode Reports the current gas mode sample zero ir zero 0 zero B 55 all span mg and span sg he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 31 host name Reports sets host name string B 44 instr name Reports instrument name B 44 instrument id Reports sets instrument identification B 44 isc iscreen Retrieves frame buffer data used for the display B 31 layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 45 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 31 list din Lists current selection for digital input B 18 list dout Lists current selection for digital output B 18 list Irec Lists current se
114. AC voltage source Check umbilical cable connections at the system interface unit and analyzer connections to the probe control Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the common electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be Connection used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table D lagrams 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults EXPANSION I O TOMEASURAVENT SYSTEM DIGITAL OUTPUTS 37 Pin LCD DISPLAY RS232 RS485 RS232 RS485 10 BASE T KEY PANEL EXPANSION RS485 iem SPARE DATA 8 Pin ANALOG OUTPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 pin gt PIs 3 Pin POWER_GOOD 3 Pin 3 Pin REAR PANEL AC INPUT Pl 2 Pin AC FRONT PANEL POWER SW gt PI6 3 Pin Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific SUPPLY MEASUREMENT INTERFACE Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams je DET 5 Pir Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 6 2
115. B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands ssssssssss B 4 Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values sss B 13 Table B 4 Record Output Formats B 21 Table B 5 Stream Time Values sss B 24 Table B 6 Gas Ranges B 33 Table B 7 Contrast L6V8l8 tives ritate tte ba B 36 Table B 8 Reply Termination Formats sss B 44 Table B 9 Set Layout Ack Values B 45 Table B 10 Allow Mode Command Values ssssssss B 46 Table B 11 Power Up Mode Values sssssssssssss B 47 Table B 12 Analog Current Output Range Values ssss B 48 Table B 13 Analog Voltage Output Range Values B 48 Table B 14 Default Output Assignment sss B 50 Table C 1 Read Coils for 60i C 9 Table C 2 Read Registers for 60i C 11 Table C 3 Write Coils for 60i sss C 13 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 60i D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 60i sss D 7 Table E 1 Retrieving System Data via MODBUS C Link or Analog Outputs E 3 Table E 2 Accessing System Status via MODBUS C Link or Digital Outputs E 5 Table E 3 Triggering Events via MODBUS C Link or Digital Inputs E 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 60 Multi Gas Analyzer measures gas concentrations using non dispersive infrared
116. Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table 6 9 can be used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot Descriptions board level faults Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label INTF DATA Reference Designator J1 Pin wo N Signal Description Ground RS485 to Interface Board RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 mo N Ooo A CO N Ethernet Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input NC NC Ethernet Input NC NC EXPANSION BD J3 oOo N C wo FP CO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Expansion Board RS485 to Expansion Board INTERFACE 24V J4 32 24V Ground 1 0 6 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual J5 oOo oO A CO N Power Fail Relay N C Contact Digital Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Digital Ground TTL Input 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 7 TTL Input 7 8 TTL Input 8 9 TTL Input 10 10 Ground 11 TTL Input 13 12 TTL Input 15 13 Digital Ground 14 Analog Voltage 1 15 Analog Voltage 3 16 Analog Ground 17 Analog Voltage 5 18 Analog Ground 19 Analog Ground
117. C 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to Ox7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the ins
118. Calibration Used to view calibration diagnostic information Diagnostics e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration ERED NUIT Py Tite Ex di BUE Lid Bs EEE CELL The Zero menu is used to access commands that will adjust the analyzer zero or background for each measurement channel When Zero is selected the screen displays the following three options e O2SENSOR e IR BENCH e BOTH The operator then has the opportunity to zero just the O sensor to zero just the infrared bench all other gases or to zero both measurement systems at the same time The specific cylinder that will be used to zero each measurement system is also indicated To start a zero adjustment move the cursor to the appropriate line and pan e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Calibration Menu 3 24 Model 60 Instruction Manual Span The display will now indicate which measurement device was selected such as O2 IR or O2 IR and the selected calibration Note that the choice of cylinder and a description of the mixture that each cylinder contains must be entered in the Calibration Setup menu described later in this chapter From the Calibrate Zero adjustment screen that follows press gt to start the actual zero adjustment process A countdown timer will then appear in the status bar indicating the time required to complete the zero adjustment process This time is the averagi
119. Commands Datalogging gt in Fun m Alarm Status O2 No xternal Alarm 3 xternal Alarm 2 xternal Alarr Concentration Alarr Zer al Cyl Zero Il Purg A i Zen Data Valid L Check Fla D EU Span Singl Checking Cal Cyl Span Muti Settir i aa Span NOx Cyl 4 Event Flac Oy 5 Event Running Ry No Event Runninc FLAG STATUS 60i Hex to Binary Conversion Table L TRANSLATOF e NS Blowback Flag REVI E 1 Executing Blowbacl 2 A Not iting Blowback x ifa 4 gt D Eo ri Er Figure B 2 Flag Status Datalogging B 16 Model 60i Instruction Manual clr records clr lrecs clr srecs This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The following example clears srecs Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok copy sp to lrec copy sp to srec copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging The scratch
120. Communications Configuration on page B 41 e I O Configuration on page B 47 e Record Layout Definition on page B 57 Model 60i Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Instrument Identification Number Instrument Identification Number Commands B 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent of the instrument s identification number plus 128 For example if the instrument ID is set to 60 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 188 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Instrument ID on page 3 58 The commands are not case sensitive Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 188 decimal which directs the command to the Model 603 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an
121. Diagram Measurement System 6 9 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap 7 4 Figure 7 2 Model 607 Component LayOUt ocoocioocioiccnonoconinccnnncnnincnnrnccnrnnnooos 1 8 Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Pare ceste e aks A 1 9 Figure 7 4 Removing the Optical Bench sss 7 11 Model 60i Instruction Manual xix Figures Figure 7 5 Optical Bench Bottom View sss 1 13 Figure 7 6 Removing the Detector Cover 7 15 Figure 7 7 Removing the Detector Board Assembly 1 16 Figure 7 8 Replacing the Filter Wheel Motor 7 18 Figure 7 9 Replacing the IR Source 7 24 Figure 7 10 Cleaning the IR Source Window sss 1 24 Figure 7 11 Replacing the DC Pump pump shown is for use with Oz sensors 7 25 Figure 7 12 Replacing the Pressure Transducer Assembly 1 2 Figure 7 13 Replacing the 3 Way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Assembly and Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor aria dorso tatu ett teres 1 30 Figure 7 14 Replacing the Sample Flow Switch or the Cal Out Valve 1 31 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor 7 34 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Fan ou ccc ceceseseseeceesesesteseseseeceessseacseees 7 36 Figure 7 17 Replacing the DC Power Supply sssssssss 7 37 Figure 7 18 Rear Panel Analog
122. Fisher Scientific Scheduling Automatic Calibration Main Menu Y Calibration Y Calibration Setup Y Set Autocal Schedule Y Cal Sequence 1 Y Next Run Save Frequency Save Controlling Events Via Third Party Digital 1 0 or MODBUS Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Once calibration events and sequences have been defined the Model 607 can be programmed to execute calibrations on a routine basis without operator input Use the following procedure to configure the 60 for automatic calibration 1 From the Main Menu select Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Set Autocal Schedule 2 Select Cal Sequence 1 or Cal Sequence 2 3 Select the Next Run press and set the date and time when the sequence should occur for the first time Press to save the new date and time Any date and time that is later than the current system time can be entered 4 Press to return to the Cal Sequence 1 menu select Frequency and enter the elapsed time that should occur between executions of this calibration sequence Press to save the new elapsed time The interval is entered in days and hours and indicates the elapsed time from one start of an autocal sequence to the next start of that same sequence If the value is set to zero the automatic calibration function is disabled for the selected sequence
123. Hags Indicates various diagnostic or alarm conditions Digin Status Indicates status of raw digital inputs Units Indicates the types of units ppm mg m 96 of the available gases 3 52 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to the selected data fields that are tied to the selected record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear Important Note Be aware that performing this action will delete all of your previously logged data A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Commit Content RUE Pria LH DHOBMI do pihe dnin i Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content described previously Important Note Be aware that performing this action will delete all of your logged data A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu is used to configure the datalogging for the currently selected
124. If you attempt to enter a value above the upper limit or below the lower limit a prompt is displayed to indicate this and the value you attempted to enter is automatically changed to the limit value You still need to press to save the change A e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Units gt Set Analog Ranges gt CO 3 20 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Averaging Time Calibration Menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Averaging Time The Averaging Time screen allows the user to change the time period over which the concentration measurements are averaged Available averaging times are 10 30 60 120 and 300 seconds The concentration measurement shown on the front panel display is updated every 10 seconds However the value shown on the display is actually the average value measured over the course of the selected averaging time For example if the averaging time is set to 60 seconds the concentration readings shown on the display at any given time are the average concentrations measured over the last 60 seconds Note that the selected averaging time is also applied to data that is collected over the analog outputs or through the digital I O system Increased averaging time reduces random variations or noise in the displayed values This improves the apparent signal to noise ratio and the instrument s minimum detectable concentration However increased averaging time also causes the instrument to have
125. Important Note Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree Refer to Cleaning the Optics in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Action Alarm Concentration CO Conc C02 NO N02 NOX 02 S02 Concentration has exceeded range limit Concentration low Check to ensure range corresponds with expected value If not select proper range Check user defined low set point set to zero Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Possible Cause Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Alarm Sample Flow Flow of sample gas is too low Pump defective Pump disconnected Defective or disconnected flow switch cable Plumbing connection configuration Check sample capillary for blockage Replace as necessary If using sample particulate filter make sure it is not blocked Disconnect sample particulate filter from the sample bulkhead if flow increases replace the filter Repair or replace pump Connect pump Check flow switch cable Check plumbing connections Alarm Cal Flow Calibration gas flow rate is insufficient Defective or disconnected cal flow switch cable Defective cal solenoid Increase cylinder pressure Check lines for obstructions and clear lines as necessary Check cal flow switch cable Cal gas not connected or connected to wrong cylinder
126. In addition to controlling events by autosequencing with the Model 61 as described previously calibration sequences or individual events can be controlled using a third party digital I O controller PLC PC or datalogger or by using MODBUS write coils For example if you want to trigger an O sensor zero default event 2 you can assign digital I O 2 to trigger Event 2 Then every time you activate digital I O 2 the oxygen sensor will be re zeroed using the delay and duration specified in the Event 2 definition To assign an event to digital I O refer to Digital Input Settings on page 3 71 Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 27 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Using Third Party Digital 1 0 or MODBUS without Events or Sequences 4 28 Model 60i Instruction Manual Setup Events Serial Ethernet or Discreet 1 0 Serial Ethernet Discreet 1 0 Trigger Events Assign Digital I O via MODBUS to the Events Write Coils i Trigger Events via External 1 0 Controller Events or sequences can also be triggered using the MODBUS write coil function For detailed information about initiating events via MODBUS refer to 0x05 Force Write Single Coil on page C 7 and Table C 3 on page C 13 In systems that use a PLC or data logger to control the calibration gases directly it may be easier to calibrate the 607 without using defined events or calibration sequences
127. Input and Output Pins 1 39 Figure 7 19 Replacing the Source Housing Thermistor Cable Assembly 7 44 Figure 7 20 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 1 48 Figure 7 21 Rear Panel Board Connectors sssssssss 7 48 Figure 7 22 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 52 Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 53 Figure 8 1 Hardware Components cccccccccsceseseesestesescesestesesesesteseeeseeneees 0 3 Figure 9 1 Bench Moi eones 9 5 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting sse 9 6 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack MOUNTING ocooococicoonoicnnoncnnincnoncnrnnonocoronnonorornnnonos 9 7 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly sssssssssssss 9 8 Figure B1 Alarm Flag Stats io ee eot ete B 13 Figure B 2 Flag Status B 16 Figure E 1 Rear Panel Connectors oocooocicccccoconicccnnocononncnnocononocnnoccnonocnrnncnnnoos E 2 Figure E 2 Analog Voltage Outputs Rear Panel Pinouts E 4 Figure E 3 Digital Outputs Rear Panel Pinouts ssssssss E 5 Figure E 4 Digital Inputs Rear Panel Pinouts sssssssss E 7 Figure E 5 Example of 0 Status During Manual Calibration E 8 Figure E 6 Example of Output Status During Autocal
128. Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings select relay Instrument State Event Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Non Calibration Inputs Analog Output Configuration Select Channel 3 74 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Non Calibration Inputs menu is used to configure digital inputs for selected actions Aouts to Zero and Aouts to FS sets the analog outs to zero or full scale when triggered External alarms 1 2 and 3 will show the instrument alarm when triggered The user may configure these to any external component When the Blowback is triggered the Lrec Flags record the instrument in Blowback mode and the data is flagged as invalid The Chiller Alarm may be triggered to record this fault and also cause Actions on Alarms whereby the system can respond by turning off the sample pump or purging air through the probe Save Cals is used in conjunction with a PLC to store calibration changes Lock Outputs holds the analog outputs at their current response or at a fixed percent of range The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings select relay Instrument State Non Calibration Inputs o PILQOPUPMPO The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output channels available
129. Model 60 Instruction Manual Multi Gas Analyzer Part Number 105561 00 12Feb2015 CE Thermo 2008 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEEROHS WEEE Compliance WEEE Compliance Safety Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 60 It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized into the fol
130. Model 60i Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement Parts Cleaning the Outside Case Cleaning the Optics 5 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Equipment Damage Do Not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Equipment Damage Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree A Never rub a mirror to remove debris especially gold surface mirrors Instead stream solvent on the mirror surface to dislodge any debris Compressed air may be used to dry the mirrors A Use only analytical grade isopropyl alcohol or methanol to clean the mirrors A See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts and the associated replacement procedures Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case Equipment Damage Do Not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Best results are obtained when the optics are clean The cleanliness of the mirrors should be checked any time the intensity is below 30 000 viewed on the top line of the Preamp Board Calibration screen in the Service menu since one cause of low output is light attenuation due to dirt on the mirrors Prior to cleaning the mirrors try increasi
131. NDIR spectroscopy The Model 60 combines proven detection technology easy to use menu driven firmware and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 60 has the following features e 2320x240 graphics display e Menu driven firmware e Multiple user defined analog outputs e Analog input options e High sensitivity e Linearity through all ranges e Highly specific to targeted gases e Selfaligning optics e Automatic temperature and pressure compensation e User selectable digital input output capabilities e Standard communications features include RS232 485 and Ethernet e C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 2 e Specifications on page 1 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see the Servicing chapter Model 60 Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation Principle of The Model 60 measures
132. ONC MIN NO ALARM 23 CONC MAX NO2 ALARM 24 CONC MIN N02 ALARM 25 CONC MAX NOX ALARM 26 CONC MIN NOX ALARM 2 CONC MAX 02 ALARM 28 CONC MIN 02 ALARM 29 CONC MAX S02 ALARM 30 CONC MIN S02 ALARM 31 INT TEMP ALARM 32 BENCH TEMP ALARM 33 DETECTOR TEMP ALARM 34 UMB Z1 TEMP ALARM system only 35 UMB Z2 TEMP ALARM system only 36 PROBE FILTER TEMP ALARM system only 37 PRESSURE ALARM 38 SAMPLE FLOW ALARM 39 CAL FLOW ALARM 40 DEWPOINT ALARM 41 REF INTENSITY ALARM 42 MB STATUS ALARM 43 MIB STATUS ALARM 44 1 0 BOARD STATUS ALARM 45 DETECTOR BOARD STATUS ALARM 46 MODEL 62i STATUS ALARM 47 EXTERNAL ALARM 1 ALARM 48 EXTERNAL ALARM 2 ALARM 49 EXTERNAL ALARM 3 ALARM 50 NO DILUTION 51 NO OZONATOR 52 CAL THROUGH SYSTEM 53 PROBE BARREL TEMP ALARM system only 54 CAL FAILED Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported In addition to the coils in Table C 1 the coils in Table C 3 are also available to be read IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument amp Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A Table C 2 Read Registers for 60 Register Number Variable
133. Options 16 75 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting 9 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly 9 8 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number
134. Pre amplifier Assembly Detector Thermistor Sample Flow Switch Oxygen Sensor optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description Hardware The filter wheel contains filters that selectively pass a wavelength that the target compounds will absorb The chopper disk rotates along with the filter wheel to periodically interrupt the radiation and create a modulated signal The chopper motor spins the filter wheel and chopper disk at a uniform speed The source housing thermistor cable assembly monitors the temperature of the infrared source which is used to control the fan speed The detector and pre amplifier assembly includes an infrared detector a pre amplifier an analog to digital converter and a thermistor The infrared detector detects the energy of the infrared light passing through the optical bench The pre amplifier assembly amplifies the pulsating signal from the infrared detector For detailed description refer to Pre amp Board Assembly on page 8 10 The detector thermistor measures the temperature of the detector assembly The sample flow switch is used to monitor the flow of sample through the optical bench When sample does not flow at the proper rate the condition triggers a low Sample Flow alarm The optional oxygen sensor is used to determine the concentration of oxygen in the sample gas Depending on the instrument configuration oxygen is measured using either an electrochemical cell or a
135. Replacement 7 22 Model 60i Instruction Manual 6 Loosen the two screws and remove the cover plate to access the optical pickup Loosen the screw and washer and remove the optical pickup and cable from the mounting block 7 Install the new optical pickup assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 8 Perform the Chopper Calibration procedure described previously 9 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual The IR source control system has been designed to operate the wire wound resistor IR source conservatively in order to increase its life Nevertheless the IR source does have a finite life Since the IR source is relatively inexpensive and easily replaced it is recommended that the IR source be replaced after one year of continuous use This will prevent loss of data due to IR source failure If an IR source is to be replaced on an as needed basis it should be replaced when e There is no light output as indicated by a loss of reference intensity e After cleaning the optics the preamp board calibration cannot be adjusted up to 50 000 Hz In addition it is important to clean the window that lets the infrared light pass through to the bench each time the IR source is replaced Use the following procedure to replace the IR source Figure 7 9 and clean the source housing window Equipment Required IR source Philips screwdriver small Cotton swabs Distilled water Equi
136. Reset User Zeros Resetting User Zeros View Cal Status Model 60 Instruction Manual The View Reset User Zeros screen displays the zero values that were recorded for each channel during the most recent zero calibration At the time of shipment the user values are all zeros Sudden changes in the user zero may suggest a problem with the analyzer or the calibration system Position the cursor at the desired gas on the View Reset User Zeros screen press Ce to set the user zero to O for that gas and press to save the setting Important Note Be sure to press to save the setting otherwise the setting will be lost after a power cycle A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Diagnostics gt View Reset User Zeros The View Cal Status screen is used to view the calibration status If a calibration fails the View Cal Status screen indicates that the calibration failed until that calibration is successful e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Diagnostics gt View Cal Status Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Controls Menu Datalogging Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu I5RHZE USE ILL The Instrument Controls menu contains selections that are used to control instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls
137. THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 60 Multi Gas Analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP IP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 2 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 10 e Alarms on page B 10 e Diagnostics on page B 15 e Datalogging on page B 16 e Calibration on page B 25 e Keys Display on page B 31 e Measurement Configuration on page B 32 e Hardware Configuration on page B 36 e
138. Terminal Block Description Default Assignment Connector Pin Screw Number 14 1 Analog Out 1 05 Concentration 33 3 Analog Out 2 CO Concentration 5 5 Analog Out 3 CO Concentration 34 7 Analog Out 4 NO Concentration 17 9 Analog Out 5 0 Concentration 36 11 Analog Out 6 None 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Grounds NA 13 Power Fail NC NA 20 14 Power Fail Com NA 21 15 Power Fail NO NA 3 16 TTL Input 1 Turn Pump Off 4 17 TTL Input 2 Trigger Blowback 23 18 TTL Input 3 Zero IR bench 24 19 TTL Input 4 Zero 0 sensor 13 22 20 24 Digital Grounds NA 6 21 TTL Input 5 Span using Cyl 1 25 22 TTL Input 6 Span using Cyl 2 7 23 TTL Input 7 Span using Cyl 3 Note The pin numbers on the rear panel connectors do not match the pin numbers on the terminal boards A Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration or TTL inputs the default selections may not apply Defaults shown are for a fully equipped analyzer A 2 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 2 3 Digital Outputs Right Side 37 Pin Connector Rear Panel Connector Pin 1 Terminal Block Screw Number 1 Signal Description Relay1_ContactA Installation Set Up Default Assignments Local Remote 20 2 Relay1_ContactB 2 3 Relay2_ContactA Service 21 4 Relay2_ContactB 3 5 Relay3_ContactA Z
139. The System Diagnostics menu is used to view diagnostic information involving system pressures temperatures and 62 interface board voltages e Inthe Main Menu choose System Diagnostics Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation System Menu System Pressures The System Pressures screen displays the blowback pressure e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Diagnostics gt Pressure ip guid ML PMA System Temperatures The System Temperatures screen displays the current probe filter temperature probe barrel temperature umbilical zone 1 and 2 temperatures and chiller temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Diagnostics gt Temperatures Interface Board 62 The Interface Board 62 screen is used to display the voltage readings on the 62 interface board This menu is displayed only when the 60 system option under Instrument Configuration is enabled See Instrument Configuration under the Diagnostics menu for more information e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Diagnostics gt Interface Board 621 3 12 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation System Menu PO E ALA Tg di METEEN Lid Wi mpini Prid ri System Service The System Service menu is used to set temperatures for system Menu components controlled by the 627 can be used to manually control the 607 and 61 calibration solenoids and can be used to manually trigger a prob
140. The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Geysitech protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 607 Instruction Manual D 1 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Geysitech protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Geysitech 9882 The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document CR is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt i
141. X MODE CALIBRATION 139 OZONATOR CALIBRATION 140 STORE CAL CALIBRATION 141 STORE 1 CALIBRATION 142 STORE 2 CALIBRATION 143 COMPUTE NO2 SPAN CALIBRATION 144 SPAN 02 CALIBRATION Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported CoilNumber Action Triggered Coil Group 145 SAVE CALS SAVES TO FILE Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual C 15 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Geysitech commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Geysitech protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands that follow Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 60 Geysitech Protocol specification see the following topics Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 Instrument Address on page D 2 Abbreviations Used on page D 2 Basic Command Structure on page D 2 Block Checksum on page D 3 Geysitech Commands on page D 3
142. a solenoid Open or Closed press t Jor to select the solenoid then press to toggle it Open or Closed e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Calibrator Control Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation System Menu Blowback Control The Blowback screen is used to manually activate a probe blowback Press to toggle the blowback solenoid On and Off and save the setting e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Blowback Control System Pump Control The System Pump Control Setup screen is used to set the system pump to Setup Always On Always Off or put it in the Auto mode When the setting is Always On the pump runs as long as this setting is active When the setting is Always Off the pump does not run When the setting is Auto the recommended setting the pump runs continuously if there is no Chiller Alarm or Water Slip Sensor Alarm If there is a Chiller Alarm or Water Slip Sensor Alarm the pump can be set to remain on or can be shut off until the alarm is cleared and a zero air purge can be initiated until the alarm is cleared See Actions on Alarm below Note If the chiller alarm is set to turn the pump off and the water slip alarm is set to leave it on or vice versa the pump will turn off Similarly if the chiller alarm is set to perform a zero air purge and the water slip alarm is not or vice versa the zero air purge will occur A To change the pump setting between Always On Always Off
143. age 6 2 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 8 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 e Service Locations on page 6 26 Read the safety precautions in the About This Manual section and in the Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter Diagnostic information that might be useful in troubleshooting hardware problems can be found in the Diagnostics menu The Diagnostics menu presents a series of information screens that are organized to show pressures voltages temperatures and other information describing the analyzer s current state Table 6 1 lists the Diagnostic menu items and describes their function Refer to the Operation chapter for detailed information about the Diagnostics menu Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Troubleshooting Guides 6 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table 6 1 Diagnostic Menu Selections Menu Item Description Program Shows the version numbers of the installed programs read only Versions Voltages Displays the current diagnostic voltage readings read only Temperatures Displays the temperature readings taken at several points inside the analyzer read only Pressure Displays the current optical bench pressure read only Sample Displays the water content of the sample as dewpoint and as Dewpoint concentration in ppm Ref Intensity Displays the source intensity for the r
144. age outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND Eight analog voltage inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally open and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally open contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is open or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level
145. al LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltagel 5V Ground Ground LCD ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 22 Model 60i Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 2 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO 5V LCD Signal 2 LD1_5V LCD Signal 3 LD2_5V LCD Signal 4 LD3 5V LCD Signal 5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LLP 5V LCD Signal 9 LCLK 5V LCD Signal 10 5V 11 Ground 12 25V 13 LCD Bias Voltage 14 Ground KEYBOARD J3 Keypad Row 1 Input 2 Keypad Row 2 Input 3 Keypad Row 3 Input 4 Keypad Row 4 Input 5 Keypad Col 1 Select 6 Keypad Col 2 Select 7 Keypad Col 3 Select 8 Keypad Col 4 Select Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator LCD BACKLIGHT J4 1 LCD Backlight Voltage 1 2 NC 3 LCD Backlight Ground Table 6 8 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator EXPANSION I O J1 Analog Voltage Input 1 An
146. al number set to 000 The Geysitech serial number is bold in the example Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 SP 04 SP 0000000000 lt SP gt 002 SP T 7 T Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt O000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP Al t T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Geysitech serial number set to 123 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 1230000000 lt SP gt 002 SP T 7 T Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 12 3 0000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T T T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 1230000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The following measurements reported if all gases measurable in response to DA command for the Model 60 include e CO e CO2 e NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands e NO2 e NOX e SO2 Operating and Error S
147. alibration though the Event Running output will continuously be asserted through the whole sequence To synchronize an external system with the analyzer s internal clocks for calibration the Purge output can be used to mark the start of an event s delay portion also the overall start of the event while the sample mode output going low can be used to mark the transition from the delay time to the duration When the instrument returns to sample mode this signifies either the start of a new event depending on the state of the purge output or the completion of the last event Pin 1 Sample Mode Pin 2 Zero Mode Pin 3 Span Mode Pin 4 Cylinder 1 Pin 5 Cylinder 2 Pin 6 Cylinder 3 Pin 7 Cylinder 4 Pin 8 Cylinder 5 Pin 9 Cylinder 6 Pin 10 Event Running Purge b Event 1 Zero IR ry Event 3 Span CO SO2 NOe Event 6 Span NO2 ry Event 9 Purge 6m Delay 10m Duration 6m Delay 4m Duration 6m Delay 4m Duration 8m Duration Figure E 6 Example of Output Status During Autocal Thermo Fisher Scientific
148. alog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground cO OO N oo A CO N Analog Voltage Input 7 gt o Analog Voltage Input 8 gt Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o O1 99 N Current Output 3 N o Current Output Return N Current Output 4 N N Current Output Return N a Current Output 5 N HA Current Output Return N a Current Output 6 5V MOTHER BD J2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 6 23 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 9 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock DIGITAL J2 1 Relay 1 Contact a OUTPUTS cO a N 0 0 A CO N Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a cO a N O 0 A CO N Relay 9 Contact a gt o Relay 10 Contact a 11 NC 6 24
149. alog Voltage Inputs 82i Probe Control optional RS 232 485 SAMPLE Terminal Block Ethernet Standard 0 AC Power E lt 61i Calibrator Connector Plumbing Connectors optional Digital Outputs e e 2 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Figure 2 3 Rear Panel Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Side Viewed from Top of Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Set Up JO Pin 33 Analog Channel 2 Pin 34 Analog Channel 4 Pin 36 Analog Channel 6 Pin 14 Analog Channel 1 Pin 15 Analog Channel 3 Pin 17 Analog Channel 5 Pin 18 Signal Ground A bad Pin 19 Signal Ground Figure 2 4 Pinouts of Analog Voltage Outputs e aaa SOA Pin 1 Pin 22 Digital Ground Pin 20 Co todo o Pin 3 Digital Input Channel 1 Pin 23 Digital Input Channel 3 Tr lt A Pin 4 Digital Input Channel 2 Pin 24 Digital Input Channel 4 lt Pin 6 Digital Input Channel 5 Pin 25 Digital Input Channel 6 Pin 7 Digital Input Channel 7 Pin 13 Digital Ground Figure 2 5 Pinouts of Digital Inputs Model 60 Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Set Up Table 2 2 Default Analog Voltage Outputs and Digital Inputs Left Side 37 Pin Connector Rear Panel
150. aminants that would cause a detectable analyzer response The optimal zero gas is ultra high purity UHP nitrogen because it allows simultaneous zero adjustment of the optional oxygen sensor and all of the infra red channels and because it generally provides a better level of purity with respect to the CO content Scientific gas suppliers can provide UHP nitrogen in compressed gas cylinders or as a Dewar of liquid nitrogen Nitrogen can also be generated on site from compressed air using a commercial nitrogen generator However if a generator is used the purity should be verified and additional scrubbers may be needed to remove residual contaminants including trace levels of oxygen and carbon dioxide If the Model 60 is not equipped with an optional oxygen sensor the zero gas can be high purity air from an on site zero air generator such as the Thermo Scientific Model 1160 or from a cylinder If an air cylinder will be used as the source for zero gas a high grade cylinder that is intended for use in continuous emissions monitoring CEMs applications will be needed In any case the zero gas should meet the criteria for purity that are listed in Table 4 1 If zero gas that meets the listed criteria is not available it may be possible to use a lower grade zero gas A decision about required purity levels should be based on local regulations and the actual concentration of pollutants in the sample If zero gas contaminant levels are l
151. and Auto press J to choose the setting and press to save the selection e Inthe Main Menu choose System Service Sys Pump Control Setup Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation System Menu Actions on Alarm Chiller Alarm Turn System Pump Off 3 16 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Actions on Alarm menu is used to specify how the system responds to a chiller alarm or a water slip alarm when the System Pump Control is in Auto mode e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm The Chiller Alarm menu can be used to shut off the system pump or perform a zero air purge when a chiller alarm is detected Refer to System Pump Control Setup above e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Chiller Alarm The Turn System Pump Off screen is used to toggle between Yes and No as to whether the system pump should shut off when a chiller alarm is detected e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Chiller Alarm gt Turn Sys Pump Off Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation System Menu Zero Air Purge The Zero Air Purge screen is used to toggle between Yes and No as to whether the system is purged with zero air when a chiller alarm is detected When the zero air purge feature is enabled the 612 sends zero air to the probe to flush the sample line and the 60 if the system pum
152. and configure Alarms concentration alarm limits Concentration Alarms are all user adjustable and indicate a gas concentration reading that is outside the set limits e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration Alarms 3 92 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Each Concentration Alarms screen displays the current gas concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits depend on the specific gas If an unacceptable value is entered an error message will appear The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration Alarms select an alarm ili FPE Min and Max Concentration The Min and Max Concentration Alarm Limits screens are used to change Alarm Limits the minimum and maximum concentration alarm limits The minimum and maximum concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration Alarms select an alarm Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 93 Operation Alarms M
153. and remove the cover 2 Remove the optical bench assembly following the Optical Bench Replacement procedure described previously in this chapter 3 Turn the optical bench over remove the screw holding each heater to the bottom of the optical bench and remove the four heaters and thermistor Figure 7 5 Cut cable ties as necessary Note If the heaters are difficult to remove use a small screwdriver and a hammer to dislodge them There are smaller diameter thru holes in the bench that allow this A 4 Apply heat conductive compound to the bottom sides of the heaters and install the new heaters and thermistor 5 Reinstall the bench as described previously and plug the heater cable into the appropriate voltage connector Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Bench Thermistor Assembly Replacement 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Note Older models have 1 assembly that contains both the thermistor and the heaters The replacement procedure is basically the same as for the individual assemblies Prior to installing the heaters verify that the voltage marked on the heater cartridges matches the analyzer voltage A Optical Pickup a Bench Heater Retaining Screws 4 Bench Thermistor ER Z Bench heaters 4 Figure 7 5 Optical Bench Bottom View Bench Thermistor Use the following procedure to replace the bench thermistor assembly Assembly Replacemen
154. ange the content of any field move the cursor to the appropriate line and press e EH DHOBA PLI Important Note Any changes made in this menu are considered proposed changes at this point and will not be saved or implemented until finalized in the Commit Content menu which appears under this Datalogging menu A Concentrations The Concentrations screen lists all the individual gases that the analyzer is equipped to measure Table 3 7 It allows the user to select a concentration reading that will be included in the selected data field e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content select field 1 32 Concentrations ri ee bet bmi d Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 7 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Concentrations Data Description None Leaves that record field blank CO Tracks CO concentration NO Tracks NO concentration CO Tracks CO concentration NOx Tracks combined NO and NO concentration SO Tracks SO concentration NO Tracks NO concentration Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen lists data fields other than concentration measurements Table 3 8 It allows the user to select an item to be included in the data record such as bench pressure or source temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settin
155. apil Cal Gas Out Fitting Cap if not in use lary or needle valve restricts flow to 1 5 to 2 0 LPM Calibration Gas Manifold N x Thermo Fisher Scientific lt gt 4 Normally Open X h A a Normally Closed 2 Way Three Way Calibration Valve Activates if the analyzer is in Zero or Span Mode AND it is set for DIRECT calibration Common gt gt gt gt Cal Gas In Fitting Cap if not in use Calibration gas connections to manifold All gases are regulated to the same pressure Usually 10 to 30 psi depending on choice of capillary or needle valve used downstream Calibration Flow Switch Figure 1 6 Model 60i Flow Schematic with 0 Sensor Option Model 60i Instruction Manual 1 9 Introduction Specifications Specifications Table 1 1 lists the Model 60 design specifications and Table 1 2 lists the performance specifications 1 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table 1 1 Model 60 Design Specifications Custom ranges CO 100 to 2500 ppm CO 5 to 25 NO 100 to 2000 ppm NO 50 to 500 ppm 0 100 to 10 000 ppm Dz 5 to 25 Operating 5 C to 45 C may be safely operated over the range of 0 to 45 C in non temperature condensing environments Performance specifications based on operation within 15 C 35 C range How Rate 1 0 liter per minute minimum Power 100 VAC Q 50 60 Hz req
156. arl temp Indicates the probe barrel temperature Chiller temp Indicates the chiller temperature Umb zone 1 Indicates the umbilical zone 1 temperature Umb zone 2 Indicates the umbilical zone 2 temperature Available when the instrument is configured as a system The Analog Inputs screen lists analog inputs Table 3 9 It allows the user to select an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that will be included in the selected data field e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content select field 1 32 Analog Inputs Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 9 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Analog Inputs Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Analog In 1 8 Tracks voltage inputs from external devices Non Measurements The Non Measurements screen lists status information items available for data fields Table 3 10 It allows the user to select a status related item that will be included in the selected data field e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select field 1 32 gt Non Measurements Table 3 10 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Non Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Ext Alarms Logs external alarms Alarm Flags Logs concentration alarms Cal Status Indicates the calibration status
157. arm service and password icons The word SAMPLE on the left of the status bar indicates the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode Other modes appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Firmware Overview Custom Run Screens Main Menu 3 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Title Bar Gas Name Status Bar Po uny ur mn mm Programmable Soft Key Labels Up to five Custom Run Screens can be configured For more information on custom run screens see Setup Run Screens on page 3 115 The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration readings appear above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in Service Level mode and the System menu is visible only when the System option has been enabled in the Instrument Configuration menu The Model 60 provides three different menu systems or access levels These are designated as Service Level Setup Level and Operator Level The Service Level menu provides access to all critical operating and configuration parameters Service menu Service Level locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 607 Access to Service Level menus should usually be restri
158. ases In applications where mixing or dilution of span gas is allowed a commercial gas mixer such as the Thermo Scientific Model 1467 can be utilized or a system can be assembled from individually purchased components If a dilution system is assembled on site the flow rates for span gas and dilution gas should be regulated to 196 and measured to an accuracy of at least 296 The meter and controller can be two separate devices or can be combined in one device The user s manual for the meter should be consulted for calibration information Note that all flows should be corrected to 25 C and 760 mm Hg and that care should be exercised in correcting for water vapor content Additional information on the design of gas mixing systems and calibration of flow devices can be found in the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Calibration This section presents an overview of the calibration process and provides step by step calibration procedures The calibration process overview Process and Figure 4 7 shows that calibration begins with defining the calibration Procedures cylinders and selecting the zero and O supplies The next step in the process is choosing to perform a manual calibration or to setup an automatic calibration Refer to the Calibration Worksheet at the end of this chapter for a sample calibration worksheet and exa
159. assigned to track the oxygen span cylinder state that output will also be activated To start the actual span adjustment wait for the measured value to stabilize then press the right arrow key and follow the on screen prompts A countdown timer will then appear in the status bar indicating the time required to complete the span adjustment process This time is the averaging time plus 60 seconds Press to save the span and apply the span correction Pressing _W_ before the adjustment process is complete will terminate the span adjustment without saving changes e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Span gt Span O2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Span Cylinders When Span is selected the screen displays a list of cylinders that are numbered one through six The contents of each cylinder are displayed to the right of the cylinder number and can be entered or edited in the Calibration Setup menu that is discussed on page 3 28 To adjust the span coefficient for a specific gas move the cursor to indicate a cylinder containing the gas or gases of interest and press 4 The display will then show the contents of that cylinder including the concentration of each gas Press _ _ to start the span adjustment or press to step back and select a different cylinder When the span adjustment starts a countdown timer will appear in the status bar indicating the time required to complete the proce
160. at are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EEREHZE LLL ERE ELS i Lid Dil iP oDpuiESBd Prid Y L mrib bid Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name CHRD Dum pyro i Bast ad po Cobb DENM Pria iiv vi d z id Network Time The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Protocol Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP SVR 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Output Relay Settings Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A Note Analog Input Config is displayed on
161. ate ite et ROG oe eau OAM DN UE cee 3 60 Prepend i mesa atiende ines 3 61 Add Blase nota A ton Gara ts a eis hid cena ards 3 61 lenf MM n 3 61 CONCE secured deeds ud tapete le iu teda 3 61 Other Measurements eate coe e e Seat icecdos 3 62 Model 60i Instruction Manual ix Contents Analog HDU S auto is it alerts 3 64 Non Meas remients 25 2422 o iari Ara tede dL Tet ais 3 64 TOPP Sensorial 3 65 Use DHCP ui 3 65 NP ACTORS A s ood repe rcu 3 66 INetmdsle o dete pO ode On eae e te E 3 66 Default Gateway A bred pua Osta ee ene 3 66 Host IAIN O 3 67 Network Time Protocol Server ien eise taces 3 67 VO Confiotfat ID ue eed ead varese Fondo qu sco aie gib iecds 3 67 Output Relay Serios doi erede nebat instit teu 3 68 Logic State ia 3 68 Tiistr nient State noure s OY etal eats ds A eMe 3 69 Concentration Alarms ae d detective pareti 3 69 Other Alamis a odo 3 70 System A atimnsso ases dura itas re eov ueni tue ea Ha ess 3 70 Tori arin Gestis ads 3 71 Digital Input Senos e ion tol n 3 71 Logie State ninini e A ias 3 72 T strument SEARS Si acs n 3 72 Calibration Inp ts iia ib 3 73 Event LUG csc secs iud tede trei emt Mns eoe nia te E bs 3 73 Non Calibration Inputs tease oe etia 3 74 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel 3 74 Allow Over Under Ranges aec pae E dst vendu 3 75 Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 75 Select O tpue RAMS rs dad
162. ation Zero Span Calibrate Audit Setup Oxygen Sensor Calibrate NOx Run Sequence 1 System Define Cylinders IR Bench Span O Run Sequence 2 Cylinder 1 6 Cylinder 1 6 Records Both Cylinder 1 6 Direct Select Zero Cylinders Cylinder 1 6 O Sensor IR Bench Select O Span Cyl Cal Flow Path Direct System 3 22 Model 60 Instruction Manual Figure 3 4 Calibration Firmware Structure Cal Sequence Setup Cal Sequence 1 Cal Sequence 2 Define Events Set Autocal Schedule Cal Sequence 1 Cal Sequence 2 Probe Blowback Schedule Next Time Period Duration Purge Duration Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Operation Calibration Menu The Calibration Menu includes five top level selections Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Calibration Menu Top Level Selections Menu Description Selection Zero Used to set the instrument s zero reading for all concentration measurements Span Used to set the instrument span coefficient for each individual component that the instrument can measure Calibrate Used to execute a selected calibration sequence Calibration Opens a series of sub menus and commands that allow the operator to enter Set Up data that describes the calibration cylinders that will be used and to select which cylinders will be used to zero and span each measurement channel Also used to set up the calibration sequences set auto calibration schedules and set probe blowback schedule
163. ations e Output communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Model 60 Instruction Manual 8 7 Component Description Electronics Monitoring Signals Output Communication Electronics Motherboard 8 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second counts are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If
164. automatically determine which measurement channel s will be adjusted If the event is Purge go directly to step 6 below and enter the purge duration Note that a Purge event is typically inserted at the end of a calibration sequence It defines a time period during which the zero and span cylinders are shut off but the system has not re stabilized on actual sample Data taken during a purge period is flagged as part of the calibration in the instrument s internal records and can also be marked as invalid by a data logger that is connected to the 60i rear panel I O system If the event is Span NOx you will be prompted to enter Duration A and Duration B Both A and B are typically left at the default values Duration A is a period during which the NO dilution air is turned on but the ozonator is turned off During this period the analyzer calculates the dilution ratio based on the decrease in NO concentration that occurred when the dilution air was turned on Duration B is a period during which the dilution air and the ozonator are both turned on During this period the NO2 concentration is automatically calculated based on the decrease in the NO concentration that occurs when the ozonator is turned on Refer to Calibrating NO2 with a Model 61 oz calibrator later in this chapter for more information Note that in order to use Span NOx as an event type the analyzer must be connected to the 617
165. ave Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Use the following procedure to define Calibration Sequence 1 and or Calibration Sequence 2 as necessary 1 From the Main Menu select Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Cal Sequence 1 gt Check Reset and press 2 Press to toggle between Check and Reset Selecting Reset configures the automated calibration function to perform an actual calibration in which the zero offset and span coefficient are adjusted so that the instrument readings are correct at the zero and span concentrations When Check is selected the zero and span valves will be turned on and off at the indicated times the data records will be marked to indicate a zero or span check and the calibration history will be updated However the internal zero and or span factors that determine the actual instrument reading will not be changed 3 Return to the Cal Sequence 1 menu to select the cal flow path either direct or system As mentioned in the Operation chapter under the Calibrations section a system cal flow path sends the calibration gas to the probe inlet so that it follows the same path as the sample gas A direct cal flow path sends the calibration gas directly to the analyzer bypassing the sampling system 4 Return to the Cal Sequence 1 menu to create the order of events An event corresponds to one step in the
166. bance values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Show User Zero Pre irog EH DHOBM Show User Span The Show User Span screen is used to view the user span factor values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Show User Span Pressure Calibration The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The pressure sensor s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A Important Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pressure Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 105 Operation Service Menu Calibrate Pressure Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen allows the user to view the pressure and adjust the pressure sensor to read zero at zero pressure Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before performing the zero calibration To avoid damaging the pressure sensor be sure to release the vacuum slowly to atmospheric pressure when finished A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pressure Calibration Zero Calibrate Pressure Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the pressure sensor calibration span point Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be slowly disconnect
167. bbon cable Note the orientation to facilitate reconnection 5 Install the new oxygen sensor by following this procedure in reverse order 6 After the oxygen sensor has been replaced it must be recalibrated one time using the Oxygen Sensor Calibration procedure that follows Note that this is different than the normal oxygen calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Oxygen Sensor Calibration Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor S Captive Screw Oxygen Sensor Calibration 7 34 Model 60i Instruction Manual ne ae li e e 5 lt Q PS VP VEN 5 Some tubing not shown for clarity Figure 7 15 Replacing the Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor After the oxygen sensor has been replaced this calibration procedure must be performed once This procedure is used for calibrating both the electrochemical and paramagnetic oxygen sensors with slight variations noted for each Equipment Required A source of UHP nitrogen to zero the sensor One of the other span gases that is prepared in a nitrogen balance can be used Small slotted screwdriver for paramagnetic calibration only Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal componen
168. be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press _ to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press 2 The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero 7 40 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration Note When calibrating the analog output always adjust zero first and then adjust full scale A 5 Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press Cm to return to the previous screen 7 Press Y Y to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures
169. bit unsigned integers or have to be interpreted as 32 bit unsigned integers The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value OxCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers Model 60 Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right jus
170. ble when part of a system A Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Does not start The display does not illuminate light on power switch does come On and the pump motor is not running Possible Cause No power or wrong power configuration Main fuses blown or missing Bad switch or wiring connection Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check the line to confirm that power is available and that it matches the voltage and frequency configuration of the instrument Unplug the power cord open the fuse drawer on the back panel and check the fuses visually or with a multimeter Replace fuses as necessary Unplug the power cord disconnect the switch and check operation with a multimeter Replace switch as necessary Display does not come on light on power switch does come On DC power supply failure Display failure Ribbon cable disconnected DC power distribution failure Check the green LED on the back edge of the power supply If the LED is off the power supply failed If possible check instrument function through RS 232 or Ethernet Reboot instrument Check ribbon cable on side of display board Check surface mount LEDs labeled 24V PWR on the motherboard and the interface board If lit the power is OK Pressure transducer does not hold calibration or is noisy Pressure transducer defective Connection to i
171. bles 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PIND RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED Model 60i Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Pin Color Pin Color 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE 37 LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 4 Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack top position Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack top Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front position panel ElA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots have non standard EIA locations 9 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting
172. bles reading the status of the digital outputs of the instrument and triggering or simulating the activation of a digital input to the instrument Refer to Appendix B for detailed C link information Streaming Protocol The streaming protocol provides a one way reporting capability in which data records are exported to a serial device on a regular basis without prompting Geysitech Bayern Hessen protocol The Geysitech Bayern Hessen protocol support for the Model 60 enables the user to read the various concentrations Refer to Appendix D for detailed Geysitech Bayern Hessen information MODBUS protocol The MODBUS protocol is a serial communications protocol that allows for communication between devices connected to the same network The MODBUS protocol support for the Model 60 enables the user to read the various concentrations and other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the instrument and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument Refer to Appendix C for detailed MODBUS protocol information e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Communication Protocol Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Streaming Data Configuration Streaming Data Interval Add Labels 3 60 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to select the 8 output items that
173. bly Replacement on page 7 26 e Pressure Transducer Calibration on page 7 27 e 3 Way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Replacement on page 7 29 e Sample Flow Switch Replacement on page 7 32 e 2 Way Cal Out Solenoid Replacement on page 7 31 e Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Replacement on page 7 32 e Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor Replacement on page 7 33 e Oxygen Sensor Calibration on page 7 34 e Fan Replacement on page 7 35 e DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7 36 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 37 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 40 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 41 e Source Temperature Thermistor Cable Assembly Replacement on page 7 43 e Source Temperature Calibration on page 7 44 e Ambient Temperature Thermistor Assembly Replacement on page 7 45 e Internal Temperature Calibration on page 7 46 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 47 e I O Expansion Board Replacement on page 7 47 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 49 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 50 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 50 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 52 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 53 e Service Locations on page 7 54 7 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING T
174. calibration manifold is controlled by a third party PLC or data logger that also communicates with the 607 through dedicated I O Ethernet or RS 232 connections The 60 Cal In and Cal Out bulkheads should be capped and the internal valves should be disabled via Main Menu gt Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration gt Disable Cal Valves The particulate filter is located downstream of the atmospheric pressure vent to reduce flow through the filter element The vent line must have a large ID to minimize risk of pressurizing the sample line If the calibration gases are introduced downstream of the auxiliary sample pump the capillary should be sized to provide 1 5 to 2 0 LPM of flow If the calibration gases are introduced upstream of the auxiliary sample pump the flow should slightly exceed the demands of that pump typically 5 to 6 LPM Please see documentation provided by the system integrator for additional information regarding plumbing and components that are external to the analyzer The instrument s internal plumbing includes two valves Figure 4 6 that can route the calibration gases from the CAL IN bulkhead directly into the measurement system for a direct calibration or the gases can be routed back out through the CAL OUT bulkhead for a system calibration A system calibration allows the zero and span gases to follow virtually the same flow path as the actual sample gases and can help compensate for any sampling system
175. cates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line LI An This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO
176. cca aede tpe eL OU EH ie ea ties 3 17 Tur System Tupi ta dt 3 17 Zero Ai DU ds 3 18 Range Units Mentir id ida 3 18 A c a disent nae aL idet 3 18 Set Analog RANGES coria d a 3 19 Set CO Range oro ee tto taret eb cio te p bn es bid 3 20 Pv Grae Tie od 3 21 Calibration MERU s atio rre AS 3 21 LEA H 3 23 ori mH 3 24 Calibrate NOX ER 3 25 Span Oy Sensor ii is 3 26 Span Cylinders so ate caede EE E S R RIE 3 27 Calibrate scuta dne Ce c A A A S 3 27 Calibration Setup uo aee eE M due ed 3 28 Define Eritrea 3 29 Select Zero Cylindets id 3 31 Select Oz Span Cylinder cma tee ideo 3 32 Cal Blow Path oce rd da 3 32 Cal Sequence Sd 3 33 A A ted 3 33 A EO be Amica 3 34 Cal Flow P3this uh Ctt dra 3 34 Select Events ce C 3 35 Define Exento iia 3 35 ENE PE Tail aia ai 3 36 Zero Event vpo Menus ri ds 3 37 Span Event Type Med sad 3 37 Span NOx Event Type Menta 3 37 Purge Event AAA te i E 3 37 Set Autocal Schedule at eat enda 3 38 A A tete cca e Cu Ema 3 38 Next RUN scies A Hui ERES 3 39 ESQUI ii 3 40 Probe Blowback Schedule Men trabes 3 40 Next Blowback Time Screen 5 tritt li 3 40 Blowback Period Screen ecce cc te ie ds 3 41 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Blowback Duration Screening id tuted ceseaauaee td 3 41 Blowback Purge Duration Screen eee te 3 41 Calibration Diagnostics ansia id cas ened tees Sees 3 42 Calibratio
177. celic e och ead 7 16 Filter Wheel Motor Replacemient iere be etat eene 7 17 Filtet Wheel Replacement di GU taa 7 19 Chopper Calibration Sec dob dede bra i eniin 7 20 Optical Pickup Replacement eee ee esee eae tale eset 7 21 IR Source Replacements codo dtes mode etus 7 22 DC Pump Replacement ricino dia 7 25 Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement sss 7 26 Pressure Transducer Cbr Mois iia 7 27 3 Way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Replacement 7 29 Sample Flow Switch Replacement 7 30 2 Way Cal Out Solenoid Replacement node ttes 7 31 Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Replacement 7 32 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Paramagnetio Oxygen Sensor Replacement eet cete 7 33 Oxygen Sensor Calibration hie taie eie Les 7 34 ban Replacement sol ooa ret rin uelis n ute Eu tests 7 35 DC Power Supply Replacement tren totae tasa 7 36 Analog Output Testing us otia o Ut ap Cabana 7 37 Analog Output Calibration oer three oce aio tace 7 40 Analog Input ali ratio ites 3 chet aa 7 41 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts 7 41 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 42 Source Temperature Thermistor Cable Assembly Replacement 7 43 Source Temperature Calibration nia teta eae 7 44 Ambient Temperature Thermistor Assembly Replacement 7
178. ch events are needed and in what order they will occur in the sequence If the event is defined for the Set To a brief description is shown below the event number To scroll through the list of up to 16 events press J and press to save the selection Note There is a No Event selection for any of the 10 events in the sequence that are not being used A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Cal Sequence Setup Cal Sequence 1 Event 1 10 ERE EN DHDBM Prid F ri Define Events The Define Events menu is used to define various events that may be assigned during a calibration sequence Typical events include a zero adjustment of the IR bench or a span adjustment of the oxygen sensor As many as 16 events can be defined As many as 10 of these can be chosen in any order to create the cal sequence as mentioned above Refer to Step 4 of the Completed Worksheet Example on page 4 37 to see a list of typical events In the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Define Events Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Calibration Menu 3 36 Event Type Model 60 Instruction Manual To select an event to edit move the cursor using Cr Jand press to open the Edit Event menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Define Events gt Event 1 16
179. ch i Cal Out Valve 2 Way Cal Out Solenoid Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 2 Way Cal Out Solenoid Replacement 3 Disconnect the tubing on the bottom of the flow switch from the outlet of the pump then disconnect the sample flow switch from the stainless steel fitting on the rear panel using a 9 16 inch open end wrench Remove the assembly 4 To install the sample flow switch follow the previous steps in reverse El EES Figure 7 14 Replacing the Sample Flow Switch or the Cal Out Valve Use the following procedure to replace the 2 way cal out solenoid valve Figure 7 14 Equipment Required 2 way cal out solenoid valve assembly Cutting pliers Open end wrench 9 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth
180. cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Model 60i Instruction Manual iii About This Manual FCC Compliance FCC Compliance WEEE Symbol iv Model 60i Instruction Manual Alert Description Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents Or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her Own expense A The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Desc
181. combustion by products using a variation of Op eration infrared IR absorbance spectroscopy With this technique the concentration of individual pollutants in the sample is measured based on that compound s capacity to absorb infrared energy of a specific wavelength The Model 60 is a non dispersive infrared NDIR analyzer meaning that it uses band pass optical filters rather than a diffraction grating or prism to create an IR beam with a limited range of wavelengths The basic design of a simple single beam NDIR that could be used to measure a single component is shown schematically in Figure 1 1 As illustrated in this figure infrared light or radiation with a broad range of wavelengths is generated by a glowing metal filament that is heated to a temperature of several hundred degrees Celsius The radiation passes through a rotating blade or chopper that interrupts and synchronizes the beam so that the intensity of the radiation reaching the detector is modulated If the radiation beam were not chopped the detector would become saturated and insensitive The chopped beam next passes through an optical filter that allows only a narrow range of wavelengths to pass The filter is designed to selectively pass a wavelength that the target compound will absorb If the target compound has strong absorbance peaks at more than one wavelength the peak that is most unique to that compound will usually be selected After passing through the
182. compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in the firmware Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in the firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 19 200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description 1 0 Components Streaming Data MODBUS Slave The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer data logger or PC RS 232 Connection A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the RS 232 DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector
183. corresponding reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt Table Points PILSPIPPO 3 80 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table Point The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt Point 1 10 I5RHZE CH MP Tit EH DHOBM Prid YU Lir Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config select channel select point Volts ERED CH TE ELEM Hwl pri nb EA haa i d ROSLGU i PG User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 9999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1
184. cs and input output connections and functions e Hardware on page 8 1 e Firmware on page 8 7 e Electronics on page 8 8 e I O Components on page 8 11 Hardware Model 607 hardware components Figure 8 1 include e Optical bench e Infrared source e Entrance mirror e Exit mirror e Field mirror e CaF window assembly e Relay mirror e Aperture e Optical pickup e Bench Heater assembly e Bench Thermistor assembly e Filter wheel assembly e Filter wheel e Chopper e Filter wheel chopper motor e Source Housing thermistor cable assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 8 1 Component Description Hardware 8 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Detector and pre amplifier assembly e Detector e Pre amplifier assembly e Detector thermistor Sample flow switch Electrochemical oxygen sensor optional Paramagnetic oxygen sensor optional O sensor capillary 3 Way cal valve 2 Way cal out valve Cal flow switch Pressure transducer Capillary DC pump Fan Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description Sample Flow Switch Cal Out Valve
185. ct an item that will be included in the Run screen such as bench pressure or detector temperature Refer to Item Number described previously e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen gt Item number gt Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific EN DHDBM Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 119 Operation Service Menu 3 120 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table 3 20 Data in Run Screen Other Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Bench pres Reports the pressure measured at the bench outlet Source temp Reports the temperature measured at the source housing Bench temp Reports the temperature measured at the wall of the IR bench adjacent to the heaters Detector temp Reports the temperature measured at the base of the detector assembly ACH2 ACH12 Reports absorbances for each channel See Table 3 17 Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal SO Indicates the SO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal 0 Indicates the 0 contents of the currently selected cylinder IREF Tracks raw signal intensity for reference channel Int temp Reports the a
186. cted to trained service technicians since changes in this portion of the firmware can result in instrument malfunctions that could be difficult to diagnose and correct Note The Access Level should be in Service when not in use as it prevents remote operation A For more information on the Service Level mode see Service Menu later in this chapter and for more information on the Instrument Configuration menu see Diagnostics also in this chapter The Setup Level menu system provides access to all of the operating parameters that are used in initial setup and programming of automated functions Note that the Setup Level does not allow access to the Service menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation System Menu The Operator Level menu provides a simpler interface that allows the instrument to run and be calibrated but restricts access to critical parameters and instrument configuration menus e Use f Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Press WB to return to the Main Menu or 5 to return to the Run screen Svstem Menu The System menu is used to configure and monitor the status of the 627 y Multi Gas Probe Controller and the 617 Calibrator if the 607 is used in a system EN hid System Controls The System Controls menu is used to configure component power for the 62i Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation System Menu Compon
187. ctual values for the B 30 specified gasname and point mp lin Reports sets linearization state B 30 mp points Reports sets the number of points in the multipoint B 30 linearization table mp table Lists the points in the multipoint linearization table B 29 no of Irec Reports sets number of long records stored in memory B 22 no of srec Reports sets number of short records stored in memory B 22 power up mode Reports sets the current power up mode setting B 46 pres Reports the pressure B 53 pres comp Reports sets pressure compensation to on off B 53 program no Reports analyzer program number B 45 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 31 range Reports sets the analog out range for the selected gas B 32 relay stat Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s B 50 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Command Description Page ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 31 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 31 sample Sets the gas mode to Sample B 52 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 38 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 38 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 32 Use iscreen instead source temp Reports the temperature at the source housing B 52 sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 23 span
188. cylinder 2 Receive set span cylinder 2 ok set span This command sets the instrument into span mode and begins calculating span factors After running this command wait for concentration readings to stabilize before continuing on in the span process The following example sets the instrument into span mode and begins calculating span factors Send set span Receive set span ok cal span This command triggers a span calibration based on the currently selected cylinder To select a cylinder to be spanned you can use the set span cylinder command or use digital inputs Because this is a single gas the cylinder should be defined as containing a single gas Once this is run it may take several seconds before the values are ready to be stored even if the command returns immediately The following example begins final span factors calculations Send set cal span Receive set cal span ok set default cal This command resets the user calibration settings to default values This includes zero and span values and span concentrations Send set default cal Receive set default cal ok event type eventno This command reports the type of an event number eventno The following example reports that event 8 is a span type event Send event type 8 Receive event type 8 span Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set event type eventno type This command sets an event even
189. d Carbon Dioxide 1 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation Sample _ Electronics Exhaust 1 Pyroelectric Detector Sample Cell N Y 4 gt _ Filter Wheel Chopper A A Sample Inlet i a Chopper Motor IR Source Figure 1 3 Example of Spinning Optical Filter Wheel NDIR The optical filters used in each version of the analyzer are selected based on consideration of the infrared absorbance spectra for each targeted gas and the IR absorbance characteristics of non target gases that can be expected in the intended application By knowing the IR absorbance that each gas will exhibit at each wavelength featured in the filter wheel and by including a reference filter the instrument firmware can calculate concentrations while compensating for interference from the non target gases and for any fluctuations in performance of the analyzer hardware In addition to measuring by products of combustion the Model 60 can also report the concentration of oxygen in the sample gas Depending on the instrument configuration oxygen is measured using either an optional electrochemical oxygen sensor or an optional paramagnetic oxygen sensor The optional electrochemical oxygen sensor shown in Figure 1 4 determines the oxygen concentration by measuring the ra
190. d as two hex digits A bit is set to 1 for fail and 0 for pass Bit 7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit Bit 0 UNUSED 0 UNUSED NO NO J SOz CO CO Send cal status Receive cal status 02 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 52 Model 60i Instruction Manual cal user zero This command stores the current absorbances as zero Send cal user zero Receive cal user zero ok sample This command sets the gas mode to sample Send set sample Receive set sample ok zero This command sets the gas mode to zero Send set zero Receive set zero ok detector temp This command reports the detector temperature in degrees C Send detector temp Receive detector temp 47 0 deg C source temp This command reports the temperature at the source housing in degrees C Send Source temp Receive source temp 56 5 deg C temp comp This command reports the current setting for temperature compensation The example that follows shows that the temperature compensation is set to Off no temperature compensation Send temp comp Receive temp comp off set temp comp onoff This command sets the temperature compensation to onoff where On is temperature compensation On and Offis temperature compensation Off Send set temp comp on Receive set temp comp on ok event halt This command reports the status of the event halt control bi
191. ddress for the NTP time server B 42 alarm conc max Reports sets the conc alarm max value B 12 alarm conc min Reports sets the conc alarm min value B 12 alarm flags Reports 8 hexidecimal digits or flags that represent alarm B 13 status alarm pressure max Reports sets the alarm pressure max value B 12 alarm pressure min Reports sets the alarm pressure min value B 12 alarm temp bench Reports sets the sets the bench temp alarm max value B 11 max alarm temp bench Reports sets the sets the bench temp alarm min value B 11 min alarm temp detector Reports sets the sets the detector temp alarm max value B 11 max alarm temp detector Reports sets the sets the detector temp alarm min value B 11 min alarm temp src max Reports sets the source temp alarm max value B 10 alarm temp src min Reports sets the source temp alarm min value B 10 alarm trig conc Reports sets current concentration alarm trigger sense B 12 allow mode cmd Reports sets the current set allow mode command B 45 analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 47 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 48 analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel B 48 autocal action Reports sets the event number assigned for action number in B 29 autocal sequence autocal check Reports sets the status of the autocal sequence check mode B 28 On Off autocal freq Reports sets the run frequency of autocal sequence B 28 Thermo Fisher Scie
192. de cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local or set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands The default value is 0 ignore the commands Table B 10 The example that follows shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands Refer to the table that follows Model 60 Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 46 Model 60i Instruction Manual If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to ignore the commands value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted upon but will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting an ok response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting 4 The example that follows sets the instrument to accept the
193. der is described using the Define Cal Cylinders menu Main Menu gt Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Define Cylinders Figure 4 8 See also the Define Cylinders menu on page 3 29 The screen lists all of the cylinders by number and displays the contents of each one See also the Calibration Worksheet at the end of this chapter To operate the screen scroll the cursor to the cylinder of interest and press A data entry screen will then open to allow the concentration values to be edited Note that the concentration units ppm 96 etc are not selected here so the concentration must be entered in same units that were selected in the Range Units Menu If the span mix does not contain all of the listed gases the concentration values for the missing gases should be entered as zero For step by step instructions on entering cylinder definitions refer to the Define Cylinders menu on page 3 29 qui ubi Pet pihe fiini i Figure 4 8 Defining Calibration Cylinders The Select Zero Cylinders screen is used to designate which cylinder or cylinders will be used to provide the zero gas for each measurement system optional oxygen sensor and IR bench For detailed information on selecting the zero cylinders refer to Select Zero Cylinders on page 3 31 See also the Calibration Worksheet at the end of this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Designating 02 Span Cylinder Manual Calibration Manual Ca
194. dividual cylinders or gas supplies At least one calibration cylinder will be a zero gas and up to five cylinders will supply span gases The composition of each cylinder supply must be defined in the Calibration Setup menu Each calibration event zero or span is then triggered with a reference to a specific cylinder or gas supply Before attempting a calibration the operator should take the time to fully understand the calibration procedure and to enter a calibration program Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Introduction Pre Calibration 4 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual that is appropriate to the specific installation The calibration program is a five step process 1 Define contents of the calibration cylinders 2 Select a zero cylinder for the IR bench 3 Select a zero cylinder for the O sensor if present 4 Select a span cylinder for the O sensor if present 5 Define a sequence of events such as zero O sensor that will constitute a full calibration The 60 allows the operator to define up to two calibration sequences that can include multiple events Each calibration sequence can be programmed to occur automatically on a user defined interval or as noted previously they can be triggered with input from the front panel or a remote data system For example one calibration sequence could be set to check daily zero and span functions for each component The second sequence could be se
195. e iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 607 Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN
196. e Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert Description DANGER A hazard is present that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A personal injury if the warning is ignored A CAUTION A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A f WARNING A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious Equipment Damage A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property N damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert Description WARNING The Model 60 is supplied with a three wire N grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A ii Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert f CAUTION Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash immediately using soap and water A Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover
197. e blowback It is also used to control the system sample pump and determine actions taken in the event of a chiller alarm or water slip alarm See System Alarms under the Alarms menu for more information e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service Probe Filter Set Temperature The Probe Filter Set Temperature screen is used to change the probe filter set temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose System Service Probe Filter Set Temp POE E EYES En d METER Lid ri ee bet Rri Taic MEI Probe Barrel Set Temperature The Probe Barrel Set Temperature screen is used to change the probe barrel set temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose System Service Probe Barrel Set Temp Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation System Menu Umbilical Zone 1 and Zone 2 Set Temperature Calibrator Control 3 14 Model 60 Instruction Manual pH ud PULP The Umbilical Zone 1 Set Temperature screen is used to change the set temperature for umbilical zone 1 The Umbilical Zone 2 Set Temperature screen operates the same way Note Zone 2 is not typically used for umbilicals less than 150 feet long A e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Umb Zone 1 Set Temp Used for testing purposes the Calibrator Control screen is used to open and close solenoids in the 60 and 617 and to activate the ozonator Refer to the Multi Gas Sytem Manual for complete details To toggle
198. e 2 1 Vent gt Atmospheric Sample Conditioner Chiller Pump Numbered Steps Described in Table 2 1 Model 61 optional Figure 2 1 Model 60 Rear Panel Gas Connections 2 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Set Up Sample Inlet Instrument Bulkhead lt Vent to Exhaust Line at Atmospheric Pressure Input Gas Line from Bypass Pump Figure 2 2 Atmospheric Bypass Plumbing Table 2 1 describes the numbered steps shown in Figure 2 1 Table 2 1 Connecting Gas Lines Connect the sample line from the chiller bypass pump to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty wet or incompatible materials All tubing should be constructed of FEP Teflon 316 stainless steel or similar with an OD of 1 4 inch Note Sample gas must be filtered conditioned and delivered to the analyzer at atmospheric pressure The filter should have a nominal pore size of 1 micron or less and the dew point must be between 2 to 8 C A Note It may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure A Connect umbilical calibration gas line to CAL OUT 3 Connect the output from the calibration manifold span gases and zero air to CAL IN via inch tubing OD with an ID of 1 8 inch or greater The length of the exhaust l
199. e Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits Selections of 7 or 8 are available with 8 being the default value e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Data Bits EH DHOBM Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port Selections of NONE EVEN or ODD are available with NONE being the default value e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Parity il DHOBM Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to select the number of stop bits for the serial port Selections of 1 and 2 are available with 1 being the default value e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits EH DHOBM Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Instrument Controls Menu RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the instrument A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Sel Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator
200. e Minimum and Maximum Internal Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Temp Internal gt Min or Max System Alarms The System Alarms menu is used to display and configure system alarm limits System alarms generally indicate some type of system related hardware or operational failure If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL which indicates a problem with the component e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 99 Operation Alarms Menu ip gies MAMA Probe Filter Temperature The Probe Filter Temperature screen displays the current probe filter temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 200 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Probe Filter Temp Min and Max Probe Filter The Min and Max Probe Filter Temperature alarm limit screens are used to Temperature Limits change the minimum and maximum probe filter temperature alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Probe Filter Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms g
201. e Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 Press to move the cursor to Valve Leak Test and press to display the Valve Leak Test screen This screen is used to view the pressure and to toggle both solenoid valves on and off For more information about this screen refer to the Operation chapter 4 Disconnect the sample input line from the rear panel plug the SAMPLE fitting the CAL IN fitting and the CAL OUT fitting Figure 5 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance DC Pump Rebuilding DC Pump Rebuilding 5 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual A NS EN EXHAUST CAL OUT N CAL IN tu SAMPLE A 4 ox v 5 Figure 5 2 Rear Panel Plumbing Fittings If the pump diaphragm is in good condition there are no plumbing leaks and the capillary is not blocked it should take approximately five minutes from the time the inlets are plugged to obtain a reading that is less than approximately 200 mm Hg Note that the plumbing on the closed sides of the solenoid valves can be tested by toggling each solenoid valve On one at a time and observing the pressure If there are leaks systematically move the plug downstream to locate the source Tighten any loose fittings and replace any damaged components as needed Note that the pump diaphragm can be visually inspected for damage by followi
202. e balance gas has no impact on the calibration procedure but it may have an impact on the stability of the calibration cylinder Note that it may be possible to reduce the total number of calibration cylinders by using a span gas prepared in nitrogen as the zero gas for the optional oxygen sensor For example a cylinder of 500 ppm CO in nitrogen balance could be used as the span gas for the CO measurement channel and as the zero gas for the oxygen sensor The concentration of each pollutant in the span gas cylinders should be specified so that the instrument can be spanned at a concentration that is about 80 of the expected measurement range for that compound Refer to Figure 4 1 The assay of the cylinder should be traceable to a recognized authority such as The United States National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST or an approved gas manufacturer s Certified Reference Material CRM Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Equipment Required Cylinder Recertification Blended Cylinders 4 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual Max expected measurement Span cal 80 of Max _ e Instrument response a Zero cal Calibration standard Figure 4 1 IR Channel Calibration The gas cylinder s should be recertified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program A recommended protocol for certifying gas cylinders against a certified reference is given in the Quality Assurance
203. e current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is displayed only if the optional I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages f Ph dy Pp pH iD PRiPPCHEL YU DIS PFiribbd The Motherboard Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages Motherboard o PILQPUPMPO Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board Voltages screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is displayed only if the optional I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the temperature readings taken at several points inside the analyzer The source temperature is the temperature reported by a sensor located at the source housing The bench temperature is the temperature reported by a sensor attached to the aluminum bench housing near the bench heaters Th
204. e detector temperature reports the actual temperature of the IR detector The internal temperature is the ambient temperature inside the analyzer and is reported by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Temperatures Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Diagnostics Menu PU ba EE EE Pressure The Pressure screen read only displays the current optical bench pressure The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer in line with the optical bench e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure Sample Dewpoint The Sample Dewpoint screen read only displays the approximate water content in the sample in terms of dewpoint in C and the water concentration in ppm e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Sample Dewpoint PILSPIPPO Ref Intensity The Ref Intensity screen read only displays the measurement of the source intensity If the source fails this measurement will drop to zero e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Ref Intensity 3 88 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu ESEIEBZEE ak dey EH uie Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the eight user scaled analog input readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Analog Input Readings
205. e instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 60 Send instr name Receive instr name Multigas Analyzer Multigas Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification ID The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 60 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument ID to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed is 60 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new ID for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 60 Receive set instrument id 60 ok set layout ack value This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested where value represents the function according to Table B 9 Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok Table B 9 Set Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number which will be dependent on the current version Send program no Receive program no iSeries 60iTLE 01 02 12 095 allow mo
206. ect SREC LREC screen is used to select short record srec or long record lrec format for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select SREC LREC DH pikari Pet pihe fiini i View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by number of records or date and time e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data 3 46 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Use t Jor 4 to change between of Recs and Date Time Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the starting point from which to display the number of previous records The screen also displays the total number of that record type in the log e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data gt of recs gt CREE Dum PTE ES mn ULP Tisei foose PME oe ti het Pio de iu The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Use to page up and down and Ce gt to pan left and right to view data Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to select a starting point from which to view logged data For example if 01 AUG 2007 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this
207. ed so the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span calibration The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Pressure Calibration Span 3 106 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Set Default Pressure The Set Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration pressure calibration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Set Defaults 0 Sensor Calibration The O Sensor Calibration screen is used to calibrate either of the optional oxygen sensors after the oxygen sensor has been replaced The instrument firmware will display the appropriate calibration screens based on the type of O sensor that is installed Important Note This calibration should only be performed by a trained service technician when the oxygen sensor has been replaced Routine calibrations should be performed using the procedures described in the Calibration chapter A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service O2 Sensor Calibration EDBEIZE mb drs Py Tit Ci bet Rri Taic ri t i d iniri Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 107 Operation Service Menu Calibrate 0 Sensor Zero The Calibrate O Sensor Zero screen is used to view and calibrate the Electrochemical 0
208. ee Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 607 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 A ES 222 El gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Local Remote Service bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 service on bit 1 pass lock on Zero IR 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Zero 02 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Span Single 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Span Multi 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Cal Cylinder binary encoded 000 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 T 001 first 110 0 1 0 o o o o o 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 60 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Concentration Alarms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Temperature Alarms 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Board Alarms 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual D 7 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands D 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Pressure Alarm 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Intensity Alarm 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Dewpoint Alarm 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 J0 Flow Alarm 0 J1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not used 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Connect
209. eference channel It serves as an indicator of source and detector condition Analog Input Displays the eight user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board Readings option is installed Analog Input Displays the eight raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board Voltages option is installed Digital Inputs Displays the state of the 16 digital inputs read only Relay States Test Analog Outputs Instrument Configuration Displays the state of the ten digital outputs eight solenoid outputs and allows toggling of the state to either On 1 or Off 0 Used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs six voltage channels and six current channels if the 1 0 expansion board option is installed Displays instrument hardware configuration information and allows toggling System indicator as Yes or No Contact Information Displays telephone numbers of the customer service support centers The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 2 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Table 6 3 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition Note System alarms are only visi
210. elay Setup gt select relay gt Instrument State Concentration Alarms The Concentration Alarms status screen allows the user to select a concentration alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State gt Concentration Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Other Alarms The Other Alarms status screen allows the user to select an alarm status to be assigned to the selected relay output other than concentrations or system related functions The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State gt Other Alarms System Alarms The System Alarms status screen allows the user to select a system alarm status for the selected relay output This screen is available only if the analyzer is configured as part of a system The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State gt System Alarms 3 70 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls
211. electrochemical oxygen sensor by screwing it in by hand Do not overtighten the O ring seal is sufficient Reconnect the oxygen sensor cable 5 After the electrochemical oxygen sensor has been replaced it must be recalibrated one time using the Oxygen Sensor Calibration procedure that follows Note that this is different than the normal oxygen calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor Replacement Param agnetic Use the following procedure to replace the optional paramagnetic oxygen sensor Figure 7 15 Oxygen Sensor Equipment Required Replacement Paramagnetic oxygen sensor assembly Philips screwdriver 2 open end wrenches 7 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Using the wrenches loosen the nuts on the inlet and outlet tubes of the sensor to remove the stainless steel fittings 3 Using the Philips screwdriver loosen the three captive screws to remove the sensor from the floorplate 4 Carefully lift the oxygen sensor out of the instrument and disconnect the ri
212. emp Analog Input 3 if the I O expansion board is installed Detector Temp Analog Input 4 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed ACH2 ACH12 Analog Input 5 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed 02 Cal CO Analog Input 6 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed N02 Cal C02 Analog Input 7 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Cal NO Analog Input 8 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Cal NO2 Cal S02 Cal 02 IREF Int Temp Dewpoint BB Pres P Filter Temp P Barrel Temp Chiller Temp Umb Zone 1 Umb Zone 2 Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input 3 78 Model 60 Instruction Manual channels available for configuration This screen is displayed only if the optional I O expansion board is installed Configuration includes entering a descriptor units decimal places choice of 2 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Descriptor Units Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1
213. ent Power The Component Power menu is used to configure component power for the 627 Multi Gas Probe Controller e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Controls gt Component Power ip sud ML PRA Probe Filter Power The Probe Filter Power screen is used to enable or disable power for the sample probe s filter heater e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Controls gt Component Power gt Probe Filter Probe Barrel Power The Probe Barrel Power screen is used to enable or disable power for the sample probe s barrel heater e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Controls gt Component Power gt Probe Barrel 3 10 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation System Menu I5RHZE CHA ELEM Fel yt EA haa i5 d ROSGLGU Cop EM Umbilical Zone 1 Power The Umbilical Zone 1 Power screen is used to enable or disable power for the heater in the first section or zone of the sampling umbilical If the umbilical is less than 150 feet long Zone 1 may control the entire line e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Controls gt Component Power gt Umbilical Zone 1 Ea Cir a El DENM Pria iv vi i Mii Umbilical Zone 2 Power The Umbilical Zone 2 Power screen is used to enable or disable power for the heater in the second section or zone of the sampling umbilical e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Controls gt Component Power gt Umbilical Zone 2 Cop EB System Diagnostics
214. ent settings The example that follows reports that the source temperature alarm minimum value is 45 C Send alarm temp scr min Receive alarm temp scr min 45 deg C set alarm temp src min value set alarm temp src max value These commands set the source temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the source temperature alarm limits The example that follows sets the source temperature alarm maximum value to 47 C Alarm limit range 8 47 C Send set alarm temp src max 47 Receive set alarm temp src max 47 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms alarm temp bench min alarm temp bench max These commands report the bench temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example that follows reports that the bench temperature alarm minimum value is 46 C Alarm limit range 40 55 C Send alarm temp bench min Receive alarm temp bench min 46 deg C set alarm temp bench min value set alarm temp bench max value These commands set the bench temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the bench temperature alarm limits The example that follows sets the bench temperature alarm maximum value to 50 C Send set alarm temp bench max 50 Receive set alarm temp bench max 50 ok alarm temp detector min alarm temp detector max These commands report the detector
215. ents xvi Chapter 9 Model 60 Instruction Manual P ramagnetic Oxygen Sensor cadsiecetisccaetuaistiesas sheadeacdstertisneneaate 8 6 Os Sensor Capillary initial 8 6 3 Way Cal Valve and 2 Way Cal Out Valve sss 8 6 2 Way Cal Out Valve iaa dias 8 6 Cal Flow das 8 6 Pressure Trans dr e ei 8 7 A E 8 7 DE PUMP EE 8 7 Fase A 8 7 O EE mentors 8 7 Instrument Controller ea tna lee nts 8 7 Montoneros 8 8 Output Communications aiana tesi oor dex elena osa de fure 8 8 Electronics caisse ode tud e dd dade aan 8 8 Motherboards sd e cete ete ota datus tnde Co ede atte 8 8 External Connectots ede aia 8 9 Internal A A bueno eat tdn d 8 9 Measurement Interface Board ansia ie Quetisiid 8 9 Measurement Interface Board Connectors ees 8 9 Pre amp Board Assembly uitae et eiecit e celal 8 10 Digital Output Board ter Urn d kat taret da et eue 8 10 I O Expansion Board Optional iniciacion 8 10 Front Panel Connector Board eec ooh p ena dh 8 10 I O CombponEbEs icio equ a id 8 11 Analog Voltage OPI ni ette oe ie o apa 8 11 Analog Current Outputs Optional ess 8 11 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional esses 8 12 Digital Relay Outputs visionaria ias 8 12 Digital Tip nt seat toe on doeet 8 12 ed cet 8 12 RS 232 Comme cto mis cie siters een te n nere een ee evi ele eua ie waves 8 13 RS 485 Comme ch Ont wes obama tede POR Pea Ede tieu 8 13 Ethernet Connection
216. enu Min Trigger Concentration Other Alarms 3 94 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Minimum Trigger screen is used to view and set the concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration Alarms select an alarm Min Trigger The Other Alarms screen generally indicates some type of hardware or operational failure If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Other Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Dewpoint The Dewpoint screen read only is used to view the actual current sample dewpoint reading and warning alarm and high alarm limits Alarm limits range from 10 to 15 degrees C An alarm is activated if the dewpoint reading goes above the warning alarm or high alarm limit and the alarm bell icon appears in the
217. epresented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol This control command is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when Service Level mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command STX5ST address control command ETX BCC OR STX S T address control command CR OR STX S T address SP control command CR OR STX5ST address SP control command ETX BCC Model 60 Instruction Manual D 3 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the received command does n
218. er If a change is made a question mark will appear to the right of the cylinder number Press to save the changes or to exit without saving e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Select Zero Cylinders USE ILL Pv DH DENM JHR Pihke ni The IR bench can be zeroed on either ultra high purity UHP air or with UHP nitrogen The optional oxygen sensor can be zeroed with UHP nitrogen or with one of the span gases that is prepared in nitrogen balance Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Calibration Menu Select 0 Span Cylinder Cal Flow Path 3 32 Model 60 Instruction Manual If UHP nitrogen is used as the zero gas the O2 sensor and IR bench can be set to use the same zero cylinder in which case the Zero menu discussed previously will allow all of the measurement channels to be zeroed simultaneously in a single step Otherwise the two will need to be zeroed independently The Select O2 Span Cylinder screen is used to select which cylinder will be used to provide the span gas for the optional oxygen sensor To change the current setting press jto step through the cylinder numbers and the press 9 to save the setting If a change is made a question mark will appear to the right of the cylinder number until the change has been saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Select O2 Span Cylinder DH
219. er oF ems espalda tue tein 3 118 Item Numbers iia 3 118 COTICEHEEHEIOIISE cube in pps re cerkub atu ven at bvace dine DURS dive utet 3 118 Other Measurements ido aa 3 119 Analog nubes cedo cene orc edet eco ooa betta tat 3 121 No Measur ments ed esit On atti ras e Re ETE End cies 3 121 Start sil MM 3 122 Disparate 3 122 Adjust Peak Offset init ita 3 122 Raw Dati Display nl bd 3 123 Valya Leak O 3 123 607 Pump Control Setups ovas 3 123 Dewpoint Span Cala 5 cu n ehe tinae 3 124 Multipoint Linearization Setup ninas 3 124 Edit Linearization Parametros t pe etie 3 126 Set Number of Points discite etu e te tede tons 3 127 Setup Polnts cM 3 127 Internal Temperature Calibration c aene n eo eie rs 3 128 Restore Factory Defaults cuit aod edente ectetur 3 128 Password Meu ied cota beide etie tate edo eddie igi fes 3 129 Set Password edad etti tuer ud e KE E leta eris 3 129 AA tette scd es bci a 3 130 xii Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation 3 130 Change Password ciere ecd retia ai 3 130 Remove Password ule di ic 3 131 Unlock Instrumental 3 131 Chapter 4 Calibration nome herbe 4 1 Intro Ur 4 1 Pre Calo varia A eno t dad 4 2 Zero nd Span Pr equency casas eas ose der iab uc ie 4 3 Eqgupment Required 20m petat A aD s 4 3 Zero Gas SUP Ly ton da Eed 4 3 Serb DES siii a 4 4 Span Gas S
220. ere because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Model 60 Instruction Manual B 61 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol
221. eriodic maintenance procedures that should be P P P performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This includes the sample pump solenoid valves the optional electrochemical O sensor and IR source which have a limited life Clean the optics only when you are certain they need cleaning Read the Equipment Damage notices in the Cleaning the Optics procedure before cleaning the mirrors This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Optics on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 4 e Pump Test and Internal Leak Test on page 5 5 e DC Pump Rebuilding on page 5 6 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis
222. ero Mode 22 6 Relay3_ContactB 4 7 Relay4_ContactA Span Mode 23 8 Relay4_ContactB 5 9 Relay5_ContactA Blowback 24 10 Relay5_ContactB 6 11 Relay6_ContactA Purge 25 12 Relay6_ContactB 7 13 Relay7_ContactA General Alarm 26 14 Relay7_ContactB 8 15 Relay8_ContactA Detector Temp 27 16 Relay8_ContactB 9 17 Relay9_ContactA Sample Flow 28 18 Relay9_ContactB 10 19 Relay10_ContactA Reference Intensity 29 20 Relay10_ContactB 21 not used 30 31 32 33 22 24V 23 not used 34 35 36 37 24 24V Model 60 Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Set Up 2 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table 2 4 Optional Analog Current Outputs and Analog Voltage Inputs 1 0 Expansion Board 25 Pin Connector Rear Panel Terminal Block Signal Description Connector Pin Screw Number 15 1 10ut1 13 2 Isolated ground 17 3 10ut2 16 4 Isolated ground 19 5 10ut3 18 6 Isolated ground 21 7 IQut4 20 8 Isolated ground 23 9 IQut5 22 10 Isolated ground 25 11 10ut6 24 12 Isolated ground 1 13 Analog In1 2 14 Analog In2 3 15 Analog In3 4 16 Ground 5 17 Analog In4 6 18 Analog Inb 7 19 Analog In6 8 20 Ground 9 21 Analog In7 10 22 Analog In8 11 23 Ground 14 24 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Connecting Power Startup Shutdown Important Tips Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Startup Before the power cord is connected be sure that the front panel power
223. ervice Lock Analog Outputs Some applications may require the analog output locked toshow a simulated instrument response during calibrations The Analog Out Lock Type screen is used to select the analog output lock setting There are three different types of output locks e No Lock Outputs will never be locked regardless of the state of any of the triggers e Lock Current Locks outputs to current value holds output at value immediately prior to the lock e Lock Percent Locks outputs to set percentage of output range When either a Lock Current setting or a Lock Percent setting is selected any of the following triggers will lock the analog outputs e Digital input lock activated by hardware or via MODBUS e C link commands lock outputs lock action lock percent e Front panel screen activated lock Lock Analog Outputs screen Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Unit being in calibration and or non sample mode All of the triggers must to be off in order to return the analog outputs to normal operation For example while the user could activate the digital input and be guaranteed to lock the outputs releasing that digital input will not return the outputs to normal operation if one of the other triggers is still active The screen and C link command may report that the trigger is off but that is ONLY for that particular trigger The only way to definitively turn off the output locking is
224. ese outputs indicate which cylinder should be flowing at what times The event running output is asserted whenever an event is processing This can be relied upon for synchronization between the instrument and any external system regarding event timing Model 60 Instruction Manual E 7 Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications E 8 Model 60i Instruction Manual Pin 3 Event 1 Pin 23 Event 3 Pin 25 Event 6 Purge Input Pin 1 Sample Mode Pin 2 Zero Mode Pin 3 Span Mode Pin 4 Cylinder 1 j Pin 5 Cylinder 2 Pin 6 Cylinder 3 Pin 7 Cylinder 4 Pin 8 Cylinder 5 Pin 9 Cylinder 6 Pin 10 Event Running j Purge Output Rising edge of digital input Event Rising edge of digital input Rising edge of digital input Digital input Purge 1 used to trigger configured Event 3 used to trigger Event 6 used to trigger flags instrument data as event 1 to run Zero IR configured event to run configured event to run invalid while asserted Span CO SO2 NO Span NO2 Figure E 5 Example of O Status During Manual Calibration Figure E 6 shows the state of the outputs during an automatic calibration Functionally the outputs are identical to a manually triggered c
225. ess than 0 196 of actual measurement levels they will have little impact on instrument performance Table 4 1 Zero Gas Contaminant Limits Contaminant Maximum Concentration 05 500 ppm for zero nitrogen CO 0 5 ppm CO 10 ppm NO 0 5 ppm 0 0 5 ppm Hydrocarbons 0 5 ppm H20 5 0 ppm 10 C dew point Scrubbers 4 4 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Span Gas Standards Span Gas Concentration Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required If a zero gas does not meet necessary criteria additional gas purifying scrubbers will be required Scrubbers containing a variety of media that function by adsorption absorption or reaction of trace contaminants are available from Thermo Fisher Scientific and most scientific gas suppliers Some of the more useful gas scrubbing media are listed in Table 4 2 Individual vendors should be consulted for details on their use and effectiveness Table 4 2 Gas Scrubbing Media Media Commercial Name Contaminants Removed Silica Gel Many Water Calcium Sulfate Drierite Water Activated Charcoal Many 05 Organics Ozone Molecular Sieve Many Water Organic Compounds Potassium Permanganate Purifil NOx Soda Lime Many CO Acid gases Calibration requires a set of span cylinders that contain a known concentration of each pollutant being monitored Depending on the specific pollutant the balance gas can be air or nitrogen Th
226. ets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 17 copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 17 pad data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in long B 17 records data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in short B 17 records date Reports sets current date B 37 default cal Resets the user calibration settings to default values B 26 default params Sets parameters to default values B 37 detector temp Reports the detector temperature in degrees C B 52 dhcp Reports sets state of use of DHCP B 43 diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage level for I O expansion board B 15 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard B 15 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface B 15 board Model 60 Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual Command Description Page dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 49 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 49 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 31 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 49 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 50 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 31 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 1
227. f the analog outputs For example selecting a concentration range of 100 ppm scales the analog output to display concentrations between 0 and 100 ppm The upper end of the range can be set to any integer value up to a maximum that is dependent on the specific gas under consideration The smallest analog range for each channel is limited by the measurement Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Range Units Menu capabilities of the analyzer as indicated in the performance specifications shown in the Introduction chapter The Set Analog Ranges screen lists all the gases that the analyzer is configured to report along with the current range setting and units for each gas The concentration units displayed on the Set Analog Ranges screen are those that were chosen in the Select Units screen discussed previously To change the analog output range for any gas move the cursor to the appropriate line using Jand Jand press This will open an editing screen that will allow the operator to change the concentration that will produce a full scale analog output e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Units Set Analog Ranges Set CO Range The Set CO Range screen displays the current concentration range for the analog output assigned to report CO and allows the range value to be edited There is an identical screen for each gas that the analyzer is configured to measure Note The screen displays the maximum setting
228. f the system to ensure that no ambient air or stack gas is pulled into the analyzer However the flow must not be so high as to create a positive pressure in the analytical bench 2 Allow the instrument to sample the span gas until a stable response is obtained for the channel under consideration 3 From the Main Menu choose Calibration Span 4 If spanning NO using the Model 61 0z select Calibrate NOx Calibrates NO using an NO cylinder if accurate NO cylinder is not Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 21 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Using Event Sequences with Auto Calibration 4 22 Model 60i Instruction Manual 9 available See Calibrating NO with a Model 61 0z Clabration later in this chapter If spanning the O2 sensor select Span O2 If spanning one or more IR channels scroll down to the span cylinder of interest and press The display shows the current concentration readings and the actual span concentration for each gas that is present in that specific span cylinder If the actual cylinder concentrations shown on the display do not match the cylinder the values can be adjusted in the Define Cylinders selection of the Calibration Setup menu If the cylinder composition shown on the display is correct press gt to start the span adjustment A count down timer appears showing the time remaining for completion of the span adjustment When the timer reaches zero press
229. fic Operation Instrument Controls Menu Screen Contrast The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Values between 0 and 100 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures or lighting conditions Notes The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another If the LCD screen is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See Contrast Levels in the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Screen Contrast ERRE ELTI EN DHOBM Prid ri Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Timezone Service Access 3 84 Model 60 Instruc
230. for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed The Allow Over Under Range item scales the output to allow the operator to detect signals that have gone outside the normal range e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu o CH DEM Allow Over Under Range The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 596 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Output Config Allow Over Under Range CREE Dum PATA IWE S PATI EN mid PPP L Evi LE LE Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Action output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to assign to the selected output channel Configuration choices include selecting the range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output Choosing the signal to output is not displayed unless a specific volta
231. for the oxygen content of air cylinders to vary significantly from ambient air Refer to Table 3 4 for a cylinder definition example Important Note It is critically important that the information entered in these screens is complete and accurate If the span cylinder contains pollutants that are not entered into the cylinder definition the calibration procedure will be compromised and concentration readings will not be valid A Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 3 4 Cylinder Definition Example Operation Calibration Menu Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration Cylinder1 Cylinder2 Cylinder3 Cylinder4 Cylinder5 Cylinder 6 NO 100 ppm 0 0 0 0 0 CO 0 0 500 ppm 0 0 0 CO 0 0 20 0 0 0 NO 0 0 0 0 1000 ppm 0 SO 500 ppm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 996 Cylinder 1 Span gas for NO and SO channels Cylinder 2 Zero gas for IR bench only Cylinder 3 Span gas for CO and CO channels Cylinder 4 Zero for all channels Cylinder 5 Span gas for NO channel Cylinder 6 Span gas for 02 Select Zero Cylinders The Select Zero Cylinders screen is used to select which cylinder or cylinders will be used to provide the zero gas for each measurement system optional oxygen sensor and IR bench The current selection or configuration for each measurement device is indicated to the right To change a selection move the cursor with and then press to increment or decrement the cylinder numb
232. g lt lt X Large ID Vent Line Connect to vent Oe 0 018 ID Capillary purple blue O2 Sensor w 2S 0 006 ID Capillary green A S LT gt gt Sample flow from external pump gt o gt Ti i gt e gt Optical Bench Approximately 2 to 3 LPM Cal Shut off Valve Sample In Fitting Activates if the analyzer is Do not pressurize in Zero or Span Mode AND Pressure Sensor is set for SYSTEM calibraion pa Normally Closed M Fe Cal Out line carries calibration gas lt lt mm gt lt oma CPEs x Three Way Calibration Valve to the sample probe for a System Calibration Activates if the analyzer is in Zero or Span Cal Gas Out Fitting Normally Closed Common Mode AND it is set for DIRECT calibration Cap if not in use 2 Way Capillary or needle valve restricts flow to 1 5 to 2 0 LPM gt gt D gt jus Cal Gas In Fitting Calibration Flow Switch DES Cap if not in use Calibration Gas Manifold Calibration gas connections to manifold All gases are regulated to the 3 same pressure Usually 10 to 30 psi depending on choice of capillary or needle valve used downstream Gas Mixing Systems 4 16 Model 60i Instruction Manual Figure 4 6 Typical Plumbing Arrangement Model 60 Series CEM System Using the Model 61 Calibrator with NO Generator In most cases emissions monitoring regulations do not allow the use of a dilution system or gas mixing device for delivery of calibration g
233. g In 1 8 Tracks voltage inputs from external devices Non Measurements The Non Measurements screen lists status information items available for streaming records Table 3 14 It allows the user to select a status related item that will be included in the streaming record e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item gt Non Measurements 3 64 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 14 Data in Streaming Records Non Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Digin Status Indicates status of raw digital inputs Units Indicates the types of units ppm mg m 96 of the available gases TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings TCP IP Settings Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument The instrument s power must be cycled for a change to this parameter to take affect For additional information see the DHCP command in the C Link Protocol Commands appendix e I
234. g output 1 was configured to provide CO concentration data however you must configure your analog outputs for your particular application For analog output configuration information Refer to Analog Output Configuration Select Channel on page 3 74 A Table E 1 Retrieving System Data via MODBUS C Link or Analog Outputs Analog Outputs Description MODBUS C Link No Rear Panel Read Register Command 1 Pin 14 CO concentration 9810 CO 2 Pin 33 NO concentration 11812 NO 3 Pin 15 NO concentration 29830 NO 4 Pin 34 CO concentration 15816 CO 5 Pin 17 0z concentration 27828 0 6 Pin 36 SO concentration 31832 SO Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual E 3 Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications alo Pin 33 Analog Channel 2 Pin 34 Analog Channel 4 Pin 36 Analog Channel 6 Pin 14 Analog Channel 1 Pin 15 Analog Channel 3 Pin 17 Analog Channel 5 Figure E 2 Analog Voltage Outputs Rear Panel Pinouts Read Status The 60 allows the user to access system status conditions via e MODBUS read coils e Clink flags e Digital output connections and configurations Refer to Table E 2 for the digital output assignments associated rear panel pinouts and the MODBUS and C link methods for accessing system status Refer to Figure E 3 to locate the pins on the rear panel connector Note For purposes of this example digital o
235. ge or current channel is selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Select Output Range Set Minimum and Maximum Value 3 76 Model 60 Instruction Manual The Select Output Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog voltage output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config select channel Select Range rip guts E ox Bee EEE The Set Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 15 for a list of choices The Minimum and Maximum Value screens function the same way The following example shows the set Minimum Value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 15 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table Output Zero Value Full Scale 100 Value CO Zero 0 Range Set
236. gs Select Content select field 1 32 Other Measurements 3 50 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Inputs Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 8 Data in Srec Lrec Fields Other Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Bench pres Reports the pressure measured at the bench outlet Source temp Reports the temperature measured at the source housing Bench temp Reports the temperature measured at the wall of the IR bench adjacent to the heaters Detector temp Reports the temperature measured at the base of the detector assembly ACH2 ACH12 Reports absorbances for each channel See Table 3 17 Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal SO Indicates the S0 contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal 0 Indicates the 0 contents of the currently selected cylinder IREF Tracks raw signal intensity for reference channel Int temp Reports the ambient temperature measured inside the analyzer Dewpoint Indicates the sample dewpoint value BB pres Indicates the blowback pressure P fitr temp Indicates the probe filter temperature P b
237. gure 2 5 Pinouts of Digital Inputs 2 5 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSADUTLONS oooooooioconcionncnonocnnncnocncnrnnonororonnononoso 3 2 Figure 3 3 Model 60 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware 3 6 Figure 3 4 Calibration Firmware Structure 3 22 Figure 3 5 Example of Run Screen Contents sss 3 116 Figure 4 1 IR Channel Calibration sssssssssssene 4 6 Figure 4 2 Model 60 Rear Panel Connections sssssssss 4 8 Figure 4 3 Model 60 Plumbing Configuration ssssssss 4 9 Figure 4 4 Model 60 Plumbing to Allow System Calibration with External Wein c C M 4 11 Figure 4 5 Model 60 Plumbing to Allow Direct Analyzer Calibration with EXterhia LAOREET BE Si epa ddp A E Qaa aoc Po ee 4 13 Figure 4 6 Typical Plumbing Arrangement Model 60 Series CEM System Using the Model 61 Calibrator with NO Generator sss 4 16 Figure 4 7 Calibration Process Overview eisie 4 17 Figure 4 8 Defining Calibration Cylinders sssssssssss 4 18 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan ssssssssss 5 5 Figure 5 2 Rear Panel Plumbing Fittings sss 5 6 Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the DC Pump 5 7 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection
238. he Model 602 Due to the possibility of introducing errors it is suggested that the instrument should not be left in Service Level mode during routine operation Note The Access Level should be in Service when not in use as it prevents remote operation A The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the Service Level mode When service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the Service Level mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Service Access Level gt press C to set to Service then press Note The adjustments in the Service menu should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 103 Operation Service Menu O pH OE Bel E a E SO a EA Absorbances The Absorbances screen is used to view the real time zero compensated absorbance values Table 3 17 shows the gas measured by each filter and corresponds to the positions shown in the Absorbances screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Absorbances DH guid PLL Parse Table 3 17 Filters INT interferent Ref NO H20 INT 4 CO NO 1 INT 7 CO S0 N0 2 INT 11 INT 12 3 104 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Show User Zero The Show User Zero screen is used to view the user zero absor
239. he optical bench retaining screws Be sure to keep the O ring seated in its groove on the bench Remove the four screws holding the optical bench to the shock mounts and carefully remove the optical bench Replace the optical bench assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual o O gt anun uU S O Ple T a D 5z 7 7 2 s T J Optical Bench Retaining Screws 4 Detector Cover Retaining Screws 2 Figure 7 4 Removing the Optical Bench Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Bench Heater Assembly Replacement Bench Heater Use the following procedure to replace the bench heater assembly Figure 7 5 Assembly Replacement 7 12 Model 60i Instruction Manual A Equipment Required Bench heater assembly Heat conductive compound Flatblade screwdriver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver small Cutting pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord
240. he service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION 1f the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Model 60
241. he thermistor of the new detector board assembly 7 Install the new detector board assembly by following this procedure in the reverse order Be sure that the thermistor wires are inside of the cavity formed by the insulating foam to avoid pinching the wires Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Preamp Board Calibration 8 Re calibrate the instrument 9 Calibrate the preamp board Refer to the Preamp Board Calibration procedure that follows Detector Board Assy Detector Thermistor Retaining Screw Figure 7 7 Removing the Detector Board Assembly Preamp Board Use the following procedure to calibrate the preamp board after replacing the detector board assembly Calibration Equipment Damage This adjustment should only be performed by a qualified instrument service technician A 1 Let the instrument sample zero air for about 90 minutes 2 From the Main Menu press _ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Preamp Board Calibration gt and press The Preamp Board Cal screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Preamp Board Cal screen use t Y toset the Max Count to 52 000 then press 4 to save the value 7 16 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Wheel Motor Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servici
242. her common background gases The paramagnetic sensor operates on the principle that oxygen is a paramagnetic compound and is attracted to a magnetic field Other gases that are likely to be present at a significant concentration level are diamagnetic and will be slightly repelled by or will have no significant interaction with these fields The O sensor capillary controls flow to either oxygen sensor The 3 way cal valve directs cal gas either directly to the optical bench or back out through the cal out valve which sends cal gas to the probe The 2 way cal out valve prevents inadvertent exhaust of cal gas and sends calibration gas to the probe when a calibration is triggered The cal flow switch is used to monitor the flow of cal gas through the instrument When cal gas does not flow at the proper rate the condition triggers a low Cal Flow alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Transducer Capillary DC Pump Fan Firmware Instrument Control Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description Firmware The pressure transducer measures the pressure of the sample gas in the optical bench The capillary and the pump control the sample gas flow rate to between 1000 and 1250 cc min The DC pump draws the sample gas through the optical bench The fan provides cooling air for the instrument The processor firmware tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument control e Monitoring signals e Measurement calcul
243. ic field Other gases that are likely to be present at a significant concentration level are diamagnetic and will be slightly repelled by or will have no significant interaction with these fields Within this sensor a small dumbbell shaped body is suspended in the magnetic field formed by a permanent magnet The dumbbell is slightly diamagnetic and is repelled away from the strongest portion of the magnetic field When oxygen enters the sensor it is attracted to the strongest areas of the magnetic field and slightly alters the field characteristics causing the dumbbell to shift positions The change in position is measured by an optical sensor and can be related to the concentration of oxygen in the gas Flow schematics showing the overall instrument design and the relationship between the various analytical components are presented in Figure 1 5 and Figure 1 6 The Model 60 outputs the measurement results to the front panel display and also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection Model 60 Instruction Manual 1 7 Introduction Principle of Operation Flow Switch un Internal Sample Pump 1 LPM T fo 1 Exhaust Fitting f M i Connect to vent lt lt lt gt lt i y 0 018 ID Capillary purple blue 0 006 ID Capillary green A gt gt my gt 9 Optical Bench Cal Shut off Valve Sample In Fitting
244. ically involve the following steps 1 Zero adjust O and IR technologies with high purity No 2 Span adjust O sensor with high purity air O content 20 9 3 Span adjust CO measurement channel with CO in air or nitrogen 4 Span adjust CO measurement channel with CO in air or nitrogen 5 Span adjust NO measurement channel with NO in nitrogen 6 Span adjust NO measurement channel with NO in air or nitrogen NO can also be generated with a 6170z Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 19 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures 4 20 Performing a Zero Adjustment Main Menu Y Calibration Y Zero Y Oy IR Both Y Confirm Cylinder Y Stabilize Y Save Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 Span adjust SO measurement channel with SO in air or nitrogen An alternate procedure that uses high purity air as the zero gas for the IR channel would require the following steps start with step 3 if the O sensor is not installed 8 Zero adjust O sensor with high purity N gt Span adjust O sensor with high purity air O2 content 20 9 Zero adjust all IR channels with high purity air Span adjust CO measurement channel with CO in air or nitrogen Span adjust CO measurement channel with CO in air or nitrogen Span adjust NO measurement channel with NO in nitrogen Span adjust NO measurement channel with NO in air or nitrogen NO can also be genera
245. if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeur
246. ifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Press to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear P 8 panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press e The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays full scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value Note that the full scale output may be configured to 1V 5V 10V or 100mV If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal 7 38 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing EXTERNAL 5 ACCESSORY ETHERNET POWER FAIL RELAY DIGITAL INPUTS Analog Voltage Outputs ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUTS RS 252 485 20 o9
247. illary if the 60 has an O sensor Cut tubing ties as necessary e a Retaining Screws 4 A Figure 7 11 Replacing the DC Pump pump shown is for use with 0 sensors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement 4 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver loosen the four captive screws and lift the pump from the floorplate 5 Install the new pump by following this procedure in reverse order Pressure Transducer a the ae procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly igure Assembly Equipment Required Replacement Pressure transducer assembly Wrench 5 16 inch Cutting pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the soft tube from the pressure transducer assembly 3 Disconnect the pressure transducer connector from PRES on the measurement interface board Cut cable ties as necessary 4 Loosen the two pressure transducer assembly retaining nuts and remove the pressure transducer assembly 7 26 Model 60i Instructi
248. ilter temp min Receive sys alarm probe filter temp min 70 deg C set sys alarm probe filter temp min value set sys alarm probe filter temp max value These commands set the system probe filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the system probe filter temperature alarm limits The example that follows sets the system probe filter temperature alarm maximum value to 100 C Send set sys alarm probe filter temp max 100 Receive set sys alarm probe filter temp max 100 ok sys alarm probe barrel temp min sys alarm probe barrel temp max These commands report the system probe barrel temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example that follows reports that the system probe barrel temperature alarm minimum value is 70 C Send sys alarm probe barrel temp min Receive sys alarm probe barrel temp min 70 deg C set sys alarm probe barrel temp min value set sys alarm probe barrel temp max value These commands set the system probe barrel temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the system probe barrel temperature alarm limits The example that follows sets the system probe barrel temperature alarm maximum value to 100 C Send set sys alarm probe barrel temp max 100 Receive set sys alarm probe barrel temp max 100 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diag
249. in 160 deg C set sys alarm umb 1 temp min value set sys alarm umb 1 temp max value These commands set the system umbilical temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration representing the alarm temperature limits The set sys alarm umb 2 temp command functions in the same manner The example that follows sets the sys alarm umb 1 temp maximum value to 170 degrees C Send set sys alarm umb 1 temp max 170 Receive set sys alarm umb 1 temp max 170 ok sys temps This command reports probe filter probe barrel umbilical 1 and umbilical 2 temperatures in degrees C Send Sys temps Receive sys temps 125 1 130 2 127 3 127 2 gas mode This command reports the current gas mode sample zero ir zero O2 zero all span mg and span sg Send gas mode Receive gas mode sample lock outputs This command reports the state of the C link analog output lock When the lock is On the analog outputs will hold their values as designated by the analog out lock type lock action command The following example reports the concentration output lock is Off Send lock outputs Receive lock outputs off set lock outputs onoff onoff on off This command sets the C link analog output lock onoff where On sets the output lock On and Offsets the output lock Off The following example sets the co
250. in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list Refer to the sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable x x time 1 10 auxt 2 13 pres 3 14 smplfl 4 15 intensity list var aout list var dout list var din These commands report the list of index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode for analog outputs digital outputs and digital inputs The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging field index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 CO 5 sr 8 intt 9 cht 10 auxt 13 pres 14 smplfl 15 intensity 16 speed 28 biasv er xy Ir xy Sr xy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec lrec srec format format command In the following example the command requests an lrec with no checksum in ASCII format with text For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see Figure B 2 Send 1ro1 Receive 1ro1 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E 0 l
251. include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Also refer to Analog Input Calibration on page 3 114 Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press _ amp to scroll to a channel and press _ 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press 2 The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 42 Model 60i Instruction Manual The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 5 Press Cm gt Cm to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equ
252. ine should be less that 10 feet Verify that there is no restriction in this line Connect the EXHAUST bulkhead to a suitable vent The exhaust line should be 14 inch Note The diagram and instructions presented here assume that calibration gases will be introduced using the optional Model 61 calibration system For systems that do not feature the Model 613 see the Calibration chapter for details on alternative plumbing arrangements A Model 60 Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Set Up Making Data and 1 0 Connections Data acquisition and external control are implemented through terminal block PCB assemblies with a D Sub connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other These assemblies provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s input output I O and digital output DO connectors Refer to the I O and DO functions and pin assignments that are outlined in the following tables Note The pin numbers on the rear panel connectors do not match the pin numbers on the terminal boards See Table 2 2 Table 2 3 and Table 2 4 for detailed information A The following terminal block PCB assemblies are available for iSeries instruments e T O terminal block PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal block PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal block PCB assembly included with optional I O expansion Board Optional 4 20mA Current Outputs and An
253. ing a DCS PLC to the Model 60 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix E Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60 Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing communications between the Model 60 Multi Gas Analyzer and a DCS PLC involves making the physical connections between devices and using an appropriate method application to establish data communications Typical communications functions provided by the 607 include e Checking data values e Reading system and alarm status e Triggering events e Calibrating the analyzer The 60 provides several methods for establishing data communication with a DCS PLC including e MODBUS protocol e C Link commands e Analog output connections e Digital I O connections You can connect to the 60i via Ethernet or Serial communications RS 232 485 Refer to Figure E 1 and the Installation chapter For C link over Ethernet use port 9880 For MODBUS use port 502 Each port supports up to three connections The optional terminal block shown in Figure E 1 provides a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument It is used to break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals For additional information refer to Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual E 1 Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Connecting a DCS PLC to the Model 60i Optional 4 20mA Current Outputs and Analog Voltage Input
254. ing point for Screen the first blowback that the period then references for future blowbacks e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Probe Blowback Schedule Next Time e Push 4 jto edit the existing date and time g e Pushing steps the cursor between Days Months Years Hours and Minutes 3 40 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu e Pushing t 9 changes the value e Pushing saves the value Cop Cit pi P ici Y id LU II Blowback Period Screen The Blowback Period screen is used to configure the period between probe blowbacks This parameter controls how often the blowback will occur e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Probe Blowback Schedule Period Blowback Duration The Blowback Duration screen is used to set the duration of the blowback Screen in seconds This parameter controls how long the blowback valve stays open e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Probe Blowback Schedule Duration ENORME Bs EEE TE oa Blowback Purge Duration The Probe Blowback Purge Duration screen is used to configure the Screen duration that data records will be marked as blowback in the data logger or how long the digital output will stay enabled after each blowback The Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Calibration Menu appro
255. ing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize use and to enter the known temperature and press to save the temperature value Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuse Replacement I O Expansion Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Fuse Replacement 5 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the fuses Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter Be sure to use the correct fuses for the appropriate voltage 1 Turn the instrument Off and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 If either fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Use the following procedure to replace the I O expansion board Figure 7 20 Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover
256. internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the connector latch and pull the thermistor cable assembly from the connector on the measurement interface board Note which connector it is for re installation 3 Unscrew thermistor from the source housing window assembly using the Phillips screwdriver and remove it 4 Remove excess heat sink grease from old thermistor and coat the underside of the new thermistor 5 Mount the new thermistor cable assembly to the motor plate and plug the connector into the connector on the measurement interface board 6 Perform a source temperature calibration as noted in the next section ec Li Source Temperature Calibration Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Source Temperature Calibration Source Temp Thermistor Cable Assy Source Temperature Calibration 7 44 Model 60i Instruction Manual Figure 7 19 Replacing the Source Housing Thermistor Cable Assembly Use the following
257. ion When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password USPU ILL PT d Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Set Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 129 Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument ip guid ML Lock Unlock and If the instrument keyboard is locked via the front panel using Password gt Local Remote Operation Lock Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the keypad is locked data can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password gt U
258. ional 107237 00 101055 00 DC Pump Repair Kit AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24 VDC with Base Plate and Screws 100907 00 Fan 24 VDC 8630 Fan Filter Guard Assembly 4510 Fuse 250VAC 3 0 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC models 14007 Fuse 250VAC 1 60 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC models 108542 00 Source Temperature Thermistor with cable measures temperature at the source housing 106459 00 Oxygen Sensor Electrochemical optional 108083 00 Oxygen Sensor Paramagnetic optional 4115 Capillary green 1 1 8 x 4 006 ID used with either 0 Sensor 105132 00 Measurement Interface Board old version 105384 01 105384 02 106779 00 Optical Bench Assembly 240V for reference only not field replaceable not for sale used with old MIB 105132 00 Optical Bench Assembly 120V for reference only not field replaceable not for sale used with old MIB 105132 00 Heater Thermocouple Assembly 120V used with old MIB 105132 00 106507 00 Heater Thermocouple Assembly 240V used with old MIB 105132 00 109031 00 Measurement Interface Board new version 105384 00 Optical Bench Assembly 240V for reference only not field replaceable not for sale used with new MIB 109031 00 109417 00 Bench Heater Assembly not voltage dependent used with new MIB 1
259. ions Data Description None Leaves that record field blank CO Tracks CO concentration NO Tracks NO concentration CO Tracks CO concentration NOx Tracks combined NO and NO concentration 0 Tracks 0 concentration SO Tracks SO concentration NO Tracks NO concentration Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen lists data fields other than concentration measurements Table 3 12 It allows the user to select an item that will be included in the streaming record such as bench pressure or source temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item gt Other Measurements 3 62 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 12 Data in Streaming Records Other Measurements Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Bench pres Reports the pressure measured at the bench outlet Source temp Reports the temperature measured at the source housing Bench temp Reports the temperature measured at the wall of the IR bench adjacent to the heaters Detector temp Reports the temperature measured at the base of the detector assembly ACH2 ACH12 X Reports absorbances for each channel See Table 3 17 Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cyli
260. ipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 18 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press 4 Press to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale and press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Use 9 Jand Y to enter the source voltage and press to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Press W to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 1 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Source Temperature Thermistor Cable Assembly Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Source Temperature Thermistor Cable Assembly Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the source temperature thermistor cable assembly Figure 7 19 Equipment Required Thermistor cable assembly Phillips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any
261. is set to lock to current analog output value Send lock action Receive lock action 2 set lock action value value 1 2 or 3 This command sets the analog output lock action to value where value is 1 No locking action 2 lock to current analog output value holds at value previous to lock or 3 lock to percentage where percentage is the value set by the lock percent command or screen The following example sets the analog output lock action 3 to lock to percentage where percentage is the value set by the lock percent command or screen Send set lock action 3 Receive set lock action 3 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Format Specifier for Binary Responses Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition The erec lrec and srec layouts contain the following e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream wi
262. ist If None is selected the associated item will not be displayed on the Run screen and will skip to the next item The available data fields are organized into the following groups Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs and Non Measurements If the I O board is not present Analog Inputs will not be available e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Setup Run Screens Select a Run Screen gt Item number ip ouod ML The Concentrations screen lists all the individual gases that the analyzer is equipped to measure Table 3 19 It allows the user to select a concentration reading that will be included in the Run screen for the selected item Note that not all of these gases may be available in your analyzer Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen gt Item number gt Concentrations Table 3 19 Data None Data in Run Screen Concentrations Description Leaves that record field blank Trac s CO concentration Trac s NO concentration Trac s CO concentration Trac s combined NO and NO concentration Trac S 0 concentration S0 Trac s SO concentration NO Trac s NO concentration Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen lists data fields other than concentration measurements Table 3 20 It allows the user to sele
263. it floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as
264. ition to the coils in Table C3 the coils in Table C 1 are also available to be read Table C 3 Write Coils for 607 Coil Number Action Triggered Coil Group 100 NONE 101 SET AOUTS TO ZERO 102 SET AOUTS TO FS 103 SELECT CYLINDER 1 CYLINDER 104 SELECT CYLINDER 2 CYLINDER 105 SELECT CYLINDER 3 CYLINDER 106 SELECT CYLINDER 4 CYLINDER 107 SELECT CYLINDER 5 CYLINDER 108 SELECT CYLINDER 6 CYLINDER 109 RUN EVENT 1 EVENT 110 RUN EVENT 2 EVENT Model 60 Instruction Manual C 13 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported C 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual Coil Number Action Triggered Coil Group 111 RUN EVENT 3 EVENT 112 RUN EVENT 4 EVENT 113 RUN EVENT 5 EVENT 114 RUN EVENT 6 EVENT 115 RUN EVENT 7 EVENT 116 RUN EVENT 8 EVENT 117 RUN EVENT 9 EVENT 118 RUN EVENT 10 EVENT 119 RUN EVENT 11 EVENT 120 RUN EVENT 12 EVENT 121 RUN EVENT 13 EVENT 122 RUN EVENT 14 EVENT 123 RUN EVENT 15 EVENT 124 RUN EVENT 16 EVENT 125 INITIATE PURGE EVENT 126 ACTIVATE CHECK CAL 127 TRIGGER EXTERNAL ALARM 1 128 TRIGGER EXTERNAL ALARM 2 129 TRIGGER EXTERNAL ALARM 3 130 TRIGGER BLOWBACK 131 TRIGGER WATER SLIP ALARM 132 HALT EVENTS SEQUENCE AUTOCAL 133 RUN SEQUENCE 1 EVENT 134 RUN SEQUENCE 2 EVENT 135 SPAN MODE CALIBRATION 136 ZERO IR MODE CALIBRATION 137 ZERO 02 MODE CALIBRATION 138 SPAN NO
265. l representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e operating status SP error status Each of the two operating status and error status are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 that follow lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e 0000000000 Model 60 Instruction Manual D 5 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Measurements reported in response to DA command D 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual The Geysitech serial number defaults to zero To set the Geysitech serial number select Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Geysitech Serial No Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Geysitech seri
266. lead and releases electrons as indicated in Equation 2 The flow of electrons is passed through a fixed resistance and can be measured as a voltage drop Equation 1 O2 2H20 4e gt 4OH Equation 2 2Pb 4OH gt 2PbO 2H20 4e Since these reactions occur very rapidly the current produced is proportional to the rate at which oxygen reaches the working electrode The measured current flow can be mathematically converted to a measurement of the oxygen concentration at the entrance to the diffusion barrier which may be a capillary or a membrane Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation Note that because the lead anode is oxidized in Equation 2 these sensors have a limited life Once all the available lead has been oxidized they no longer function Typically oxygen sensors have a six to twelve month lifetime However this lifetime can vary depending on usage conditions The optional paramagnetic oxygen sensor provides functionality similar to that of the optional electrochemical sensor However it works on a totally different principal and should function indefinitely without replacement In addition to the extended operating life the paramagnetic sensor provides somewhat better analytical performance in terms of response time precision and freedom from drift The paramagnetic sensor takes advantage of the fact that oxygen is a paramagnetic compound and is attracted to a magnet
267. lected event ZERO USING CYLINDER X If the event and cylinder choice are correct confirm cylinder selection by pressing gt A countdown timer appears near the bottom of the screen When the timer reaches zero the signal should be fully stabilized If you wish to bypass the countdown timer press to jump directly to the next step At the end of the countdown the message PRESS ENTER TO SAVE ZERO will appear 5 In the Calibrate Zero screen press to save the new zero value and set the reading of the selected sensor s to zero The Span Adjustment procedure sets the instrument span for one or more components contained in one span cylinder If multiple span cylinders are being used the procedure must be repeated for each cylinder If a span cylinder contains a mixture a new span factor will be calculated for each component in the mixture If the span cylinder has only one span gas the analyzer will automatically run a check and make corrections for interference on other channels and then adjust the span factor for the specific gas contained in that cylinder 1 Turn on the flow from the span gas cylinder that contains the analytical component or components of interest Ideally the cylinder will provide a span concentration that is approximately 8096 of the current upper range limit URL of the analyzer for each compound As with the zero adjustment the total gas flow from the calibrator must exceed the total demand o
268. lection Irec logging data B 18 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page list scr Lists the 10 items in user screen B 40 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 18 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data 18 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 18 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 18 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 18 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 18 lock action Reports sets the analog output lock action B 56 lock outputs Reports sets the state of the C link analog output lock B 55 lock percent Reports sets the analog output lock percentage B 55 Ir Outputs long records in the format specified in the command B 19 Irec Outputs long records B 19 Irec format Reports sets output format for long records ASCII or binary B 20 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 23 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored B 21 Irec per Reports sets long record logging period B 21 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for long records B 22 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for short records B 22 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 31 mp Reports sets the measured and a
269. libration Sequence Overview Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures The Select O Span Cylinder screen is used to designate which cylinder will be used to provide the span gas for the optional oxygen sensor Although more than one gas cylinder may contain oxygen only the selected O span cylinder will be used when adjusting the oxygen span factor For detailed information on selecting the O span cylinder refer to Select Oz Span Cylinder on page 3 32 See also the Calibration Worksheet at the end of this chapter This section presents step by step instructions for performing a basic calibration of the analyzer using the front panel controls To perform a full calibration of the instrument the optional oxygen sensor if present and the IR bench should both be zeroed and then spanned The two measurement technologies operate independently of each other so it is possible to calibrate the IR channels without calibrating the optional oxygen sensor or vice versa It is also possible to perform a zero adjustment on either measurement device without performing a span adjustment However a span adjustment should not be run without first running the zero adjustment Note that if high purity nitrogen is used as the zero gas the optional oxygen sensor and all the IR channels can be zeroed in one step A typical calibration sequence using nitrogen as the zero gas and six individual span supplies would typ
270. ll be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII erec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are 96s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x Model 60 Instruction Manual B 57 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for Erec Layout Text Value String Value Source B 58 Model 60i Instruction Manual f parse a 32 b
271. lowing chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack set up and start up the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display screens the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 Component Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that can be
272. ltipoint Linearization is used to compensate for errors caused by Linearization Setup variations in operating conditions It is used during initial setup as applicable and is not intended to be used for routine calibration The instrument is calibrated over a wide range at the factory and multipoint linearization is used to focus more closely on specific ranges for particular applications The linearization feature is used to improve instrument performance A ten point table can be entered via the screen or c link commands Refer to Table 3 23 the associated graph and the equation that follows which explain how this feature is implemented If points are entered and the feature is enabled the measured values are processed linearly between the two closest points in the table to produce the final concentration Note that a minimum of two points must be entered 3 124 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu DE 1 Table 3 23 Point Table Example Point Actual Measured max range max range PO 0 0 Actual p11 P1 D1 M1 P2 D2 M2 P10 D10 M10 A3 P3 D3 M3 P4 D4 M4 A2 D2 M2 P5 D5 M5 A A1 D1 M1 P6 D6 M6 P7 D7 M7 PO Measured P8 D8 M8 0 0 M M M2 P9 D9 M9 P10 D10 M10 P11 Maxrange Max range Main Menu The Multipoint Lin Setup screen is used to select for which gas the multipoint linearization will be set up and it shows the operator whether Y this feat
273. lusive and number is the number of items between 1 and 10 inclusive The following example sets number of items on user screen 2 to 4 Send set user scr items 2 4 Receive set user scr items 2 4 ok user scr active screen This command reports the active state of user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive The example that follows reports the state of user screen 2 as active Send user scr active 2 Receive user scr active 2 active set user scr active screen state This command sets the active state of user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive and screen is active if state is 1 and inactive for other values The following example sets user screen 2 to active Send set user scr active 2 1 Receive set user scr active 2 1 ok copy sp to scr screen This command copies the first 10 non zero items in scratch pad to user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive The following example copies the first 10 non zero items in scratch pad to user screen 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 40 Model 60i Instruction Manual Send set copy sp to scr 2 Receive set copy sp to scr 2 ok copy scr to sp screen This command copies the items of user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive into the first 10 entries of the scratch pad The following example copies items of user screen 2 into the first 10 entries of the scratch pad Send set co
274. lv Id XON fejdsia ejeg mey L auoz dual GWA uonei amp iyuosueumasu eBueg JEPUN 4AQ MOJ Y lt lt 91 1 Sjuang UYA lt lt 4v 10jeuozo Jesyo ead Isnipy duel ueg aqoid 9 iouueu queuing Bijuo5 ndino Bojeuy lt Ol b wena IEQ uleis s 1594 Jexid Aejdsiq dual 49114 840d a i quueys eDeyoA 91 1 lt lt ured Mo 4 189 9 40pui 4 eo ueeI0S HEIS lt pieog 119 SeS lv lt s6um 1ndu jeu6ig lt yesey yoeyg lt lt lt G Jepui A2 12D 01 14 way PJeOg 1Z9SMEIS lt andino Bojeuy 1591 OL lt lt Z 1 eouenbes e9 lt lt v 19pun o 189 Sula jo JquinN suue y uieis g 8 1 plouajos sBumes ejay 1ndino lt dnieg eouanbas eg lt 4epui A2 189 palqeuz eusaju du OL L indmo lt uonesnbyuod O I ueis S Z 1epuiA2 189 9n upa lt lt 119 smeis saleig Aejou sBumes dI doL qd lt lt 1 19pun A 82 Shue eles Und 129 SMEIS 91 1 Indul lt Byuog ejeg Burueens yed Mold 189 IE2 Aem g 0S suaeiog ung dnjes poire 1e9 sinduj jeu amp ig 1020104d uoneoiunuiuio2 19 ueds o 12ejes lt ino 2 Aem Z Jos lt lt 8 1 jeuueu2 induj lt e21nog due 9 DNI Bojeuy ON leues u arisfob uoueg ul Josjuog JOJEIQUED 189 induy Bojeuy 40 28 90 dwal cageyon nduj Bojeuy al iueunasuj 1osueg O lt lt dura jeg z euoz jeaiiquif Jue24ed 4907 Dojeuy Jas youeg dw 8 L NI lt sBumes jeues lt SJepur 2 0197 199198 lt duia jeg euoz jeoijiquin ed 4907 1no Gojeuy PALOMSYION SNES sGuipeau Indul Bojeuy sBunjes uoneoiunuiuo2 9 1 sapullAg lt lt dwa
275. ly if the optional I O expansion board is installed A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration DH Guided Pil pie fini i The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the available 10 digital output relays and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected e n the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings DH pikari Pil PFiL oribnbd Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to 3 68 Model 60 Instruction Manual either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action e n the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Setup select relay 1 10 e With cursor at Logic State press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Instrument State Ihe Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output The submenu lists signal types of Concentration Alarms Other Alarms System Alarms or Non Alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output R
276. m and maximum value current settings for gas where gas is the selected gas The example that follows reports that the concentration alarm minimum value for CO is 5 2 Send alarm conc co min Receive alarm conc co min 5 2 ppm set alarm conc gas min value set alarm conc gas max value These commands set the concentration alarm minimum and maximum values for the gas selected gas to value where value is a floating point number representing the concentration alarm limits The example that follows sets the concentration alarm maximum value to 20 ppm Send set alarm conc co max 20 Receive set alarm conc co max 20 ok alarm trigger conc gas This command reports the trigger mode for the selected gas concentration alarm trigger action for the minimum alarm to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 3 The example that follows reports that the trigger mode for the CO alarm is floor Send alarm trig conc co Receive alarm trig conc co O Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms set alarm trigger conc gas value These commands set the concentration alarm minimum and maximum values for the gas selected gas to value where value is floor mode or ceiling mode according to Table B 3 The example that follows sets the alarm trigger for CO to floor Send set alarm trig conc co 0 Receive set alarm trig conc co 0 ok Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 00 Floor 01 Ceiling alarm flags Thi
277. mbient temperature measured inside the analyzer Dewpoint Indicates the sample dewpoint value BB pres Indicates the blowback pressure P fltr temp Indicates the probe filter temperature P barl temp Indicates the probe barrel temperature Chiller temp Indicates the chiller temperature Umb zone 1 Indicates the umbilical zone 1 temperature Umb zone 2 Indicates the umbilical zone 2 temperature Available when the instrument is configured as a system Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen lists analog inputs Table 3 21 It allows the user to select an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that will be included in the Run screen Refer to Item Number described previously e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen Item number Analog Inputs Table 3 21 Data in Run Screen Analog Inputs Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Analog In 1 8 Tracks voltage inputs from external devices Non Measurements The Non Measurements screen lists status information items available for a Run screen Table 3 22 It allows the user to select a status related item that will be included in the Run screen Refer to Item Number described previously e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Setup Run Screens Select a Run Screen Item number Non Measurements e Ea Cad Py tity Pria iiv vi i d init
278. measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front panel mounted graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include Thermo Fisher Scientific External Connectors Internal Connectors Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific Component Description Electronics External connectors include e External Accessory e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors include e Function key panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board Data e I O Expansion Board Data e Digital Output Board e AC distribution The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include e Data communication with the motherboard e 24V 120VAC and 220VAC inputs e Fan
279. ming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 sec set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 5 Send stream time Receive stream time O set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 5 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time 1 Receive set stream time 1 ok Table B 5 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 00 Disables time stamp to streaming data string 01 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string B 24 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration zero cyl value This command reports the value of the cylinder used for zeroing where value is either Os ir or all The following example reports that cylinder 2 is the ir zero cylinder Send zero cyl ir Receive zero cyl ir 2 set zero cyl value number This command sets the cylinder to use for ze
280. mples of the data that is required to complete a calibration Define Calibration Cylinders Y Select Zero Oylinders Y Select O2 Span Supply Cal Manual Zero y Manual Spans Use Auto Define Sequence Program Auto Cal Trigger by MODBUS Or Digital I O Figure 4 7 Calibration Process Overview Manual calibration is used for a 607 in a standalone configuration It involves manually stepping through the 607 screens to perform zero and span adjustments Automatic calibration is used for a 607 in a system configuration in addition to a manual calibration It executes calibrations on a routine basis from a defined calibration sequence of events without operator input Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 17 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures Defining Cylinders Define Cylinders Screen Designating Zero Cylinders 4 18 Model 60i Instruction Manual Note To fully utilize the analyzer s capability for running calibration events and sequences the system requires external hardware such as the 612 Calibrator or a valve manifold and PLC to provide digital I O A As noted at the start of this chapter the calibration procedure is designed around the idea that a set of two to six calibration cylinders will be used to perform a full calibration The composition of each calibration cylin
281. n Histotias 3 42 Wiew Reset Span Pacos ao 3 43 Res ttino Span Factoria at 3 43 Mie Reset User Ars canas 3 44 Res tting User Zero ii 3 44 View Cal Usa ad 3 44 Instrument Controls Menta sir dis 3 45 Datalogging Ser sac aie dedic ce aaada 3 45 Select SREC ERE C a ds esca nescio en ctum 3 46 View Logged Data A eiue cris toilets op es E e 3 46 Number of Records auus ad 3 47 Date and Time om oett tt ai 3 47 Erase Log Me Anasa aa 3 48 Select CUBEEDBur d ay peo a ae 3 48 CCOBCEDEPAETORS queria eiue Erde Eo adt BRL dire 3 49 Other Measurements eddie oed to aec cod 3 50 Analog Inputs aai debit a e te du ete i eee et t e stet eade 3 51 DNon Mieasutetients ia ad 3 52 COMME NSO CCIE sacs ren E 3 53 Reset to Default Contebbs assets bd 3 53 Configure Daralopmihe c cod cuta eaae uda te iden OO 3 54 Logging Period Miu asar anales 3 54 Memory Allocation Percentiniiaicd 3 54 Data Treatment RP PCT 3 55 Flag Status Data titi aaa di 3 55 Communication Sel 3 55 Serial Settings eos ede ud iE es d imm E 3 56 Baud Bate coectetuer 3 56 Data DIS Stout iut tasti Qupd tia Ma tet lr co Id 3 57 Parity MEM OD es 3 57 Stopi E MD Em 3 57 RS 232 RS 485 SeleCUOE i ise ae et teuer qe pe eis 3 58 lisizument ID iode a deeper eibi edt dme S 3 58 Geysitech Serial Ne psa 3 58 Communication Protocol caste ER dines 3 59 Streaming Data Configuration asedio stir queen ite db nic 3 60 Streaming Data Interval incerti io 3 60 Add Eabels 222 c
282. n information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual e Service Level mode section in the Operation chapter also includes The S Level mode sect the Operat hapter al lud parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations on page 7 54 This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 e Optical Bench Replacement on page 7 10 e Bench Heater Assembly Replacement on page 7 12 e Bench Thermistor Assembly Replacement on page 7 13 e Detector Board Assembly Replacement on page 7 14 e Preamp Board Calibration on page 7 16 e Filter Wheel Motor Replacement on page 7 17 e Filter Wheel Replacement on page 7 19 e Chopper Calibration on page 7 20 Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Optical Pickup Replacement on page 7 21 e IR Source Replacement on page 7 22 e DC Pump Replacement on page 7 25 e Pressure Transducer Assem
283. n ok Model 60 Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration dtoa channel This reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to Table B 14 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 14 Default Output Assignment DtoA Function Single Range Dual Range Auto Range 1 Voltage Output CO Low CO CO 2 Voltage Output CO High CO Range Status 3 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 5 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 6 Voltage Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 7 Current Output CO Low CO CO 8 Current Output CO High CO Range Status 9 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 10 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 11 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used 12 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used relay stat This command reports the current relay logic normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open B 50 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific
284. n switching from sample to zero and from zero to span This transition period is the time required to purge the existing air from the calibration system including the probe sample lines and analyzer Data taken during the purge process and immediately after the purge should generally be disregarded since the zero or span gas is mixing with residual sample A In order to achieve data of the highest quality the zero and span should be checked or adjusted on a routine basis Checks and or adjustments can be performed manually or they can be automated as described later in this chapter During initial operation Thermo Fisher Scientific suggests that a zero adjustment should be run once every 12 to 24 hours and a span check should be run on at least one channel every 24 hours Depending on local regulations and the initial observations of system performance it may be possible to reduce frequency as experience is gained with the system The following equipment is needed to calibrate the instrument e Zero gas supply or cylinder for each channel e Span gas standards for each measurement technology IR and oxygen e Pressure regulators for all gas supplies e A delivery system that will supply each calibration gas at the appropriate time and at the correct flow rate e A gas dilution or mixing system optional Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Equipment Required Calibration requires a supply of zero gas that is free of cont
285. n the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP Curl TE AMI 7 e Pistas p LOGGED Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Instrument Controls Menu IP Address Netmask Default Gateway 3 66 Model 60 Instruction Manual The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is Off If DHCP is On the instrument will respond with Not Settable if DHCP is On For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP described previously e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Address The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is Off If DHCP is On the instrument will respond with Not Settable if DHCP is On For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is Off If DHCP is On the instrument will respond with Not Settable if DHCP is On For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP in this chapter Any traffic to addresses th
286. ncentration of that gas should still be entered to enable interference corrections A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Define Cylinders Cylinder 1 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Calibration Menu 3 30 Model 60 Instruction Manual DE y ip pirer MLS The Define Cal Cylinders screen presents six lines corresponding to the six gases that are used for calibration Each line shows the gas identifier molecular formula for the gas at the left the concentration in the center and the concentration units on the far right To edit a concentration value move the cursor using Jand then press to open the numeric editing screen The concentration units ppm mg m 96 are not specified here so the concentration must be entered in the same units that were selected in the Range Units menu If the span mix does not contain all of the listed gases the concentration values for the missing gases must be entered as zero If a span cylinder uses air as the balance gas and if the oxygen content has not been certified by the vendor the oxygen concentration should be entered as 20 9 percent If the span gas was prepared with nitrogen as the balance gas the oxygen content should be entered as zero The oxygen content of a cylinder being used to supply span gas to the optional oxygen sensor should be certified by the vendor or by an independent analysis It is not unusual
287. ncentration output lock to On Send set lock outputs on Receive set lock outputs on ok lock percent This command reports the percent of output range that the analog outputs will lock to if locking is active and the action is set to lock to percentage The following example reports that the percent of output range that the analog outputs will lock to is 100 percent Send lock percent Receive lock percent 100 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 55 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 56 Model 60i Instruction Manual set lock percent value value 5 to 105 This command sets the analog output lock percentage to an integer value where value is the percent of the output range that the analog outputs will lock to if locking is active Limits are from 5 to 105 in percent of range For example if the user sends the command set lock percent 105 then when the analog outputs are locked they will be locked at 10 5 volts if the outputs are set to the 0 10 volt range The following example sets the lock percent to 100 percent Send set lock percent 100 Receive set lock percent 100 ok lock action This command reports the analog output lock action where 1 No locking action 2 lock to current analog output value holds at value previous to lock or 3 lock to percentage where percentage is the value set by the lock percent command or screen The following example reports that the analog output lock action 2
288. nd 40 CFR 50 Appendix C Section 12 also provides information on Calibration of Primary and Secondary Standards for Flow Measurements Specific information on certification of concentration standards is given in EPA 600 R93 224 EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards 1993 Available from www NTIS gov PB94130424 Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 31 Calibration Calibration Worksheet Calibration Worksheet Use the calibration worksheet to define and record the parameters used in performing a calibration Refer to the completed worksheet example on page 4 37 that indicates the types of data used in setting up a calibration Facility Sample Location Instrument Serial Number Installation Date Operator 1 Define Calibration Cylinders Cylinder 1 Balance gas OAir O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units CO O ppm O O mg m C02 O ppm O O mg m NO O ppm O O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m 02 O ppm O O mg m S02 O ppm O O mg m 4 32 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Worksheet Cylinder 2 Balance gas OAir O Nitrogen Gas Concentration Units CO O ppm O 96 CJ mg m C02 O ppm O 96 O mg m NO O ppm O 96 O mg m N02 O ppm O O mg m
289. nd by slowly rotating the knurled flange back and forth to give the highest reading possible on the Max Count display line Beginning with the entrance mirror adjust the mirror positions to produce the maximum intensity You may need to go back and forth between the two mirrors a few times to get the highest possible value Recheck alignment of each mirror before tightening the two binding screws on each mirror When the mirrors are adjusted and re tightened adjust the Max Count value as close as possible to 52 000 using Jand then press to save the setting Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 Remove the fan guard and filter from the rear of the instrument by unsnapping it Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filter clean with compressed air Re install the filter and fan guard Thermo Fisher Scientific Pump Test and Internal Leak Test Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Test and Internal Leak Test Filter Fan Guard Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Use the following procedure to test the pump and internal plumbing for leaks 1 Press to display the Main Menu 2 Press to move the cursor to Service and press to display the Service menu Note If th
290. nd sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok user scr title screen This command reports the title for user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive The example that follows reports the title for user screen 2 Send user scr title 2 Receive user scr title 2 CO AND CO2 CONCENTRATIONS B 38 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set user scr title screen title This command sets the title for user screen screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive and title is the text for the title Title will be auto centered in the heading and will be translated into uppercase Title has a maximum length of 26 characters The following example sets title for user screen 2 to CO AND CO2 CONCENTRATIONS Send set user scr title 2 CO AND CO2 CONCENTRATIONS Receive set user scr title 2 CO AND CO2 CONCENTRATIONS ok user scr items screen This command reports the number of items on user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive The example that follows reports the number of items on user screen 2 Send user scr items 2 Receive user scr items 2 2 set user scr items screen number This command sets the number of items on user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inc
291. nd tubing for leaks Alarm Chiller Status System alarm Liquid water passing through chiller Chiller temperature exceeds maximum allowed Check sampling system temperature flowrate and ambient temperature Check lines for visible water Alarm Reference Intensity IR source failed Detector failed Dirty mirrors Replace IR source Replace detector board assembly Verify that the mirrors are dirty Clean if necessary Important Note Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree Refer to Cleaning the Optics in the Preventive Maintenance chapter The following board related alarms only occur during power up or reboot Alarm Status 62i Board System alarm Alarm Status Detector Board Alarm Status 1 0 Exp Board Alarm Status Interface Board Alarm Status Motherboard Internal cables not connected properly Board is defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Recycle AC power to instrument If still alarming change board Alarm Temp Bench Instrument not warmed up Heaters or heater assembly not plugged in Allow more time for instrument to reach proper operating temperature Plug in heaters Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Possible Cause Defective heater or defective heater wires Improper alarm
292. nder Cal CO Indicates the CO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal NO Indicates the NO contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal SO Indicates the S0 contents of the currently selected cylinder Cal 0 Indicates the 0 contents of the currently selected cylinder IREF Tracks raw signal intensity for reference channel Int temp Reports the ambient temperature measured inside the analyzer Dewpoint Indicates the sample dewpoint value BB pres Indicates the blowback pressure P fitr temp Indicates the probe filter temperature P barl temp Indicates the probe barrel temperature Chiller temp Indicates the chiller temperature Umb zone 1 Indicates the umbilical zone 1 temperature Umb zone 2 Indicates the umbilical zone 2 temperature Available when the instrument is configured as a system Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen lists analog inputs Table 3 13 It allows the user to select an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that will be included in the streaming record e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item gt Analog Inputs DH Dh MAPA Table 3 13 Data in Streaming Records Analog Inputs Data Description None Leaves that record field blank Analo
293. ne Keyboard 3 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Firmware Overview Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview The Model 60 utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 For detailed information on access levels refer to Service Access Level on page 3 84 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen The appearance and contents of the Run screen can be altered using commands listed in the Service menu and described later in this chapter This screen provides the current instrument readings along with some additional information concerning the instrument status From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing Cm The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 5 Operation Firmware Overview pJOMSSEd aAoway psomsseg auey jueuinujsu A9OJUN A907 pJOMSSEd 19S piomssed AMO TANS JONAS lv Y synejag 4asp asojsay fav duio2 J1NI uoge4qi e2 due eutajuj d
294. ng Filter Wheel Motor Replacement 4 Re calibrate the instrument Use the following procedure to replace the filter wheel motor Figure 7 8 Equipment Required Filter wheel motor Flatblade screwdriver Allen wrenches 5 64 inch 5 32 inch Cutting pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the filter wheel motor power cable from the MOT DRV connector on the measurement interface board disconnect the IR source the optical pickup cable and the thermistor cable assembly Cut cable ties as necessary 3 Remove the three motor retaining screws securing the filter wheel motor and wheel assembly to the optical bench Figure 7 8 Be sure to keep the two spacers for these screws and note their location for reinstallation Remove the motor and wheel assembly from the measurement case 4 Remove the two remaining motor retaining screws to remove the housing Keep the spacers for these and note their location Figure 7 8 5 Remove the set screw securing the filter wheel assembly to
295. ng steps 1 6 of the DC Pump Rebuilding procedure that follows Use the following procedure to change the pump diaphragm valve plates and seal rings Figure 5 3 To replace the DC pump see the DC Pump Replacement procedure in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required DC pump rebuild kit refer to the Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 2 5 mm Allen wrench Dental pick or small slotted head screwdriver Small Phillips head screwdriver Marking pencil Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance DC Pump Rebuilding before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover Disconnect the pump from electrical power make a sketch of the position of any tubes and fittings for ease of reassembly and remove the pump from the instrument Mark the position of the pump headplate A intermediate plate C and compressor housing L relative to each other by drawing a line on the edges with a pencil or other marker to ensure proper reassembly DO NOT Overtighten Screws Typical Const
296. ng the intensity in that Preamp Board Calibration screen as close to 50 000 as possible by pressing t If this increases the intensity to greater than 30 000 the mirrors do not need to be cleaned Press to save the new setting then recalibrate the instrument If the intensity does not increase use the following procedure to clean the mirrors Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Optics Read the Equipment Damage notices in this procedure before cleaning the mirrors If you are certain the mirrors require cleaning use the following procedure to clean them Refer to Figure 7 2 to locate the optical bench mirrors Equipment Damage Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree A Never rub a mirror to remove debris especially gold surface mirrors Instead stream solvent on the mirror surface to dislodge any debris Compressed air may be used to dry the mirrors A Use only analytical grade isopropyl alcohol or methanol to clean the mirrors A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is u
297. ng time plus 60 seconds Press to save the zero and apply the zero correction Pressing Cm before the adjustment process is complete will terminate the zero adjustment without saving changes The Span menu is used to access commands that will adjust the analyzer span factor for each measurement channel When Span is selected the screen displays the following options e CALIBRATE NOX e SPAN O2 e CYLINDER 1 6 The measurement channel that will be spanned is determined by which cylinder the operator selects The span coefficient is used to adjust the instrument response such that the concentration reading produced when sampling a known cylinder matches the concentration entered by the operator Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu For example if the cylinder that is selected contains CO and SO a span adjustment will be made on both of those measurement channels As noted elsewhere span adjustments can be made using blended cylinders or cylinders that contain only a single pollutant While both methods will produce good results spanning with blended cylinders does not allow the analyzer to correct for cross interferences as efficiently as it will with single component span gases Note that selecting a cylinder that contains oxygen will not adjust the oxygen sensor span The oxygen sensor span adjustment is only triggered by the Span O command Note For detailed information about generating NOx span gas refe
298. njag ur quod ny Jeg ueds juiodmag uO S EMIY JO shemjy omy lt dnjas jo uog dund 109 189 Aem 10S IO 189 Aem z 10S eunsseJg lt 1S8 4897 ane ZL Z HO u0JjE20 yead 9 1 H U018907 ead ZL 4 HO Sejduieg jo 9 L HO Sejduies jo s Z1 4 HO 9IIe Mead 9 1 H Agen eed 9 p uue v 1X3 179 Jeuonipuo av diis 41816 sniels 1211149 ainssaig xoeqwo g uoneuuojuj 12e u02 10SU9S diN jeujeju sane 189 agesiq ua s s Josueg uaB xO FHL NO 13439 NI Je2oiny dweaig eonues dnes Joje1edQ lt 997 Sse2oy eolAJ0S euozeui awiyayeq 1sejjuo U39319 uonesueduio ainssaid uonesueduio einje1eduio 8 1 9uueyo lt lt fyuoy mduj Bojeuy lt 9 1 9uueyo Juano 9 1 jeuueu aey oA SJeuueu uang Iv SNJEIS 2D MALA SOJ9Z 1 SN 1959Y M S10 2e 4 ueds josay m 10 SIH uoneaqije2 lt sonsoubeig uonesques uogjeing nd uoneang pon d eui 1XoN lt lt ejnpeuos y eqmojg eqoJd lt Kouenbei4 ung 1X9N lt lt lt z 1 eouenbeg eg lt lt EE eBung Aly 048Z HO dund S S usin lt lt lt unejy diis 46jeM lt lt eBung Aly 048Z HO duing S S uin lt lt lt uue y 4311143 lt lt uneJy uo suonoy lt uO Shemiv HO sfemiy ony lt lt dnjag jo4juo2 dung S S Jouog yoeqmo g lt 49MOq 10 2U0ZQ Senisueiu lt Zeu0z dwelqwn pjeog uorsuedx3 O I lt sjeuueu e6ey0A IY einpeuos eaoiny 1es lt A
299. nlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and data can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands Change Password The Change Password screen is used to change the password that is used to unlock the instrument s front panel The Change Password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password ip ouod ML PA 3 130 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The Remove Password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The Unlock Instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Unlock Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 131 Introduction Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration Similar to most analytical instruments the Model 60 must be calibrated on a routine basis to ensure data integrity The calibration procedure involves sequential introduction of
300. noid Flow Switch Replacement 9 Wait at least 30 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use Ce Jand to enter the known barometric pressure and press 9 jJ to save the pressure value 10 Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer 11 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the 3 way cal solenoid flow switch assembly Figure 7 13 Equipment Required 3 way cal solenoid flow switch assembly Cutting pliers Adjustable wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the 3 way cal solenoid flow switch assembly from the Z S or CAL PATH connector and disconnect the cal flow switch cable from the CAL FLOW SW connector on the measurement interface board Cut the cable ties as appropriate 3 Disconnect the tubing from the Kynar fittings then unsnap the assembly from the two spring clips on the bracket Figure 7 13 Note the location of each tubing segment to aid in reconnection 4 To install the 3 way cal solenoid flow switch assembly foll
301. nostics Diagnostics diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 24 1 4 9 3 2 3 2 diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 24 1 14 9 4 9 3 2 3 2 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 positive 18 IR positive 18 MOT and VBIAS Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 24 1 14 9 14 9 4 9 3 2 17 9 17 9 flags This command reports 8 hexidecimal digits or flags that represent the status mode password lock pressure compensation temperature compensation purge check event blowback calibration cylinder and alarms To decode the flags each hexidecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in Figure B 2 The binary digits define the status of each parameter Send flags Receive flags 40000018 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol
302. nplugged the chassis is not at earth ground For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 To remove a mirror remove the mirror retaining screws and remove the mirror from the optical bench 3 Carefully clean each mirror by streaming solvent on the surface Rinse with distilled or deionized water Dry by blowing clean dry air over the mirror 4 Reassemble following the above procedure in reverse 5 The field mirror and the relay mirror do not need realignment but the entrance mirror and the exit mirror do need to be realigned Use the following procedure to realign the entrance mirror and the exit mirror a From the Main Menu press _4_ to scroll to Service gt press to scroll to Preamp Board Calibration and press Ce Model 60 Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning 5 4 Model 60 Instruction Manual Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A Adjust the Set to value such that the intensity count value is approximately 45 000 Set to can be as low as zero if the 45 000 count cannot be achieved Adjust the entrance mirror and the exit mirror by loosening the two screws that bind each to the optical bench a
303. ns in lrec as minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentrations values recorded in the lrecs or srecs The following example sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok Model 60 Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 18 Model 60i Instruction Manual list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 22 I 0 BD COMM closed 2 2 LOCAL REMOTE open 3 4 UNITS open 4 19 BIAS VOLTAGE closed 7 7 SAMPLE MODE open 8 8 GEN MODE open list Irec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements
304. nterface board may be defective Replace pressure transducer Check pins on interface board and crimps on the connector Run output noisy Thermo Fisher Scientific Recorder noise Sample concentration varying Dirty mirrors Replace or repair recorder Check recorder cable Run instrument on a span gas source if quiet there is no malfunction Verify that the mirrors are dirty Clean if necessary Important Note Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Malfunction Possible Cause Reference intensity low Electrochemical EC oxygen cell depleted Action they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree Refer to Cleaning the Optics in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Increase pre amp board gain to 52000 while sampling zero air replace IR source if necessary Replace EC cell Analyzer does not calibrate properly Incorrect cylinder definition System leak Pressure transducer out of calibration Dirty mirrors Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Possible Cause Verify that cylinder definitions are correct Run leak test described in Preventive Maintenance chapter to find and repair leak Recalibrate pressure transducer Verify that the mirrors are dirty Clean if necessary
305. ntific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page avg time Reports sets the averaging time for the instrument B 10 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 42 cal single gas span Triggers single gas span for the currently selected cylinder B 51 cal span Triggers span calibration based on currently selected cylinder B 26 cal status Reports the flags for span calculation failure B 51 cal user zero Triggers a zero calibration instrument must be in zero mode B 52 clr Irecs Clears away only long records that have been saved B 16 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 16 clr srecs Clears away only short records that have been saved B 16 co co2 no no2 These commands report the current concentration of the B 10 nox so2 02 specified gas contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 36 copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 17 copy scr to sp Copies the items of user screen into the first 10 entries of the B 40 scratch pad copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 16 copy sp to scr Copies the first 10 non zero items in scratch pad to user B 39 screen copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 16 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 16 copy srec to sp S
306. oco 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 lrec srec lrec xxxx yy srec xxxx yy lrec aa bb oo pp qq yy srec aa bb oo pp qq yy xxxx the number of past records yy the number of records to return 1 to 10 aa hours 01 to 24 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year Model 60 Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 20 Model 60 Instruction Manual These commands output long or short records The output format is determined by the set lrec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set srec per commands In the following example there are 740 long records currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the Flags command and Figure B 2 Send lrec 5 Receive lrec 100 5 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E 0 loco 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E 0 loco 5994E 0 intt 33 2 cht 44 7 pres 758 9 smplfl 1 085 speed 100 0 biasv 115 5 intensity 1999940 10 15 05 12 03 flags 9c040000 co 7349E40 loco 5994E
307. of the old diaphragm F from the groove in the compressor housing L Unscrew the old diaphragm F by turning it counterclockwise using both hands DO NOT use tools IMPORTANT Take care not to lose any small parts such as the spacer washers H shim rings J or spring washer K positioned between the diaphragm stud and connecting rod Holding the pump upside down while removing the diaphragm will help to keep any spacers and washers in place Place the parts removed in Step 8 onto the threaded stud of the new diaphragm Carefully screw the new diaphragm F into the connecting rod M Tighten firmly using both hands only DO NOT use tools If possible hold the pump upside down when starting the threaded diaphragm stud into the connecting rod Turn the counterweight under the diaphragm until the diaphragm is flat across Carefully center the diaphragm over the compressor housing L firmly seating the diaphragm edge into the compressor housing groove Place the clean intermediate plate C onto the compressor housing L according to your previously drawn markings then place the new valve plates D and seal rings E on top of the intermediate plate Make sure the seal rings are properly seated in intermediate plate recesses to avoid pinching Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance DC Pump Rebuilding 12 Place the clean headplate A on top of the intermediate plate C according to your previously drawn markings then tighten the four
308. og the current value at the end of the interval e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment Flag Status Data The Flag Status Data screen is used to set flag status data On Off Refer to Flag Status on page B 16 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Flag Status Data Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control Settings and configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings CH Cie hi Serial Settings The Serial Settings menu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings a Cie hi Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Baud Rate 3 56 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Data Bits Th
309. on off This command turns component power for umbilical 1 On or Off The following example turns On component power for umbilical 1 Send set sys power umbilical 1 on Receive set sys power umbilical 1 on ok sys probe barrel set temp This command reports the set temperature for the system probe barrel The following example reports the system probe barrel set temperature is 175 degrees C Send Sys probe barrel set temp Receive Sys probe barrel set temp 175 000 deg C set sys probe barrel set temp value This command defines the set temperature for the system probe barrel to value where value is a floating point number representing temperature in degrees C The following example defines the set temperature for the system probe barrel to 175 degrees C Send set sys probe barrel set temp 175 Receive set sys probe barrel set temp 175 ok sys probe filter set temp This command reports the set temperature for the system probe filter The following example reports the system probe filter set temperature is 175 degrees C Send Sys probe filter set temp Receive Sys probe filter set temp 175 000 deg C set sys probe filter set temp value This command defines the set temperature for the system probe filter to value where value is a floating point number representing temperature in degrees C The following example defines the set temperature for the system probe filter to 175 degrees C Send set sys probe filter set temp 175
310. on Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Transducer Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration Retaining Nuts 2 Remove Tube Pressure Transducer Assy Figure 7 12 Replacing the Pressure Transducer Assembly 5 To install the pressure transducer assembly follow the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the pressure transducer Refer to the Pressure Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer Refer to Pressure Calibration on page 3 105 for additional information Notes An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading Therefore if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump adjust only the span setting A A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and comparing it to the pressure reading However since these pressures are usually corrected to sea level it may be necessary to correct the reading to local pressure by subtracting 0 027 mm Hg per foot of altitude A Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration 7 28 Model 60 Instruction Manual Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known accurately A Equipment Required Vacuum pump Equipment
311. oose Service gt O Sensor Calibration gt Set Defaults Preamp Board The Preamp Board Calibration screen is used to view and adjust the Calibration preamp board calibration parameters The value should be set so that the max count value shown on screen is approximately 50 000 Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 109 Operation Service Menu Source Temperature Calibration Analog Output Calibration 3 110 Model 60i Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Preamp Board Cal The Source Temperature Calibration screen is used to view and set the source temperature sensor offset Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Source Temp Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to calibrate the six voltage channels and six current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed and to select the calibration action zero or full scale Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Calibrate Zero Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale Thermo Fisher Scientific Ope
312. or a specific event Refer to the Calibration chapter for a more detailed description Duration Used to configure the run time for a specific event Refer to the Calibration chapter for a more detailed description The Set Autocal Schedule menu is used to program the Model 60 to execute calibrations on a routine basis without operator input To implement the auto calibration function you define the composition of the span gas cylinders define events create either one or two calibration sequences with the order of the selected events and then set the autocal schedule This programs the analyzer to execute each calibration sequence at a set interval starting at a specific date and time e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Set Autocal Schedule Cal Sequence The Cal Sequence menu is used to configure two autocal schedules If no 3 38 Model 60 Instruction Manual frequency value is entered the Next Run will show Disabled even when a date was entered for the next run which shuts off that sequence and disables that autocal e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Set Autocal Schedule Cal Sequence 1 or 2 Note that the Cal Sequence 1 and Cal Sequence 2 menus operate the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Next Run Operation Calibration Menu KORTE meh dt PPP LES Civi The Next Run screen is used to configure the next r
313. or by external fittings A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any connected equipment A Never clean the mirrors unless you are certain they need cleaning Any contact with the mirror surface will degrade it to some degree A Never rub a mirror to remove debris especially gold surface mirrors Instead stream solvent on the mirror surface to dislodge any debris Compressed air may be used to dry the mirrors A Use only analytical grade isopropyl alcohol or methanol to clean the mirrors 4 Replacement of the filter wheel should only be performed at an authorized Thermo Fisher Scientific service center To retain maximum performance the wheel must be characterized using equipment and procedures that are only available at an authorized service center A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry
314. or these and note their location Figure 7 8 5 Remove the set screw securing the filter wheel assembly to the motor shaft and remove the filter wheel assembly 6 Install the new filter wheel by following the previous steps in reverse Note When installing the new filter wheel assembly on the motor shaft make sure that the set screw seats on the flat of the motor shaft and then tighten the set screw A 7 Perform the Chopper Calibration procedure that follows 8 Perform the Preamp Board Calibration procedure on page 7 16 9 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Use the following procedure to adjust the peak offset to zero 1 From the Main Menu press _4_ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Adjust Peak Offset gt and press The Adjust Peak Offset screen appears Note If the Service menu is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Level on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 Use 4 to change the Window Delay value so that the displayed Peak Offset value is zero Note that pressing Cr causes the Peak Offset value to decrease pressing Y causes the Peak Offset value to increase 3 Press to save the value Thermo Fisher Scientific Optical Pickup Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Optical Pickup Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the optical pickup Figure 7
315. orates the 617 Calibrator all calibration functions can be automated and controlled through the 60 firmware In order to prevent pressurization of the inlet during direct instrument calibration the Teflon particulate filter is located upstream of the atmospheric pressure vent The vent line must have a large ID to minimize risk of pressurizing the sample inlet Calibration gas pressures and flows should be adjusted to provide approximately 5096 more flow than the pumps demand typically 1 5 LPM for a direct calibration and 5 to 6 LPM for a system calibration Please see documentation provided by the system integrator for additional information regarding plumbing and components that are external to the analyzer 4 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required OS JUlog meq 1ejuo eBeis z JUSA OL sneux3 uy ejduies peddeg mo eo pedde ul e9 JezA euy 109 Josues dis 48IEM INd1S 01 dung ajdwues NA A Jy uoje 9 ES suorjeoroads ojo pue dumd a dures uo juopuedop NdT 9 K oyeuurxoJdde 03 MOT sjorso1 9A EA o poou JO Kre rde piopuen Seg uoneiqieo Ni l eA KeA c euond N i duing onjeisueg eurT o dureg poH eur uoneJqyeo UleaJjisuwop pasn AJLA e peeu Jo uejideo jo aoroyo uo Buipuedep eds ZO 9
316. ot satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode instrument address 5 lt STX gt STO05 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command initiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA DA command that follows The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated wi
317. ould be left at open to prevent the action from being triggered e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt select relay 1 16 e With the cursor at Logic State press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed DH HIM ML PRA Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is tied to the selected digital input e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State DH HIM PLP 3 72 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Calibration Inputs Items in the Calibration Inputs menu are used to configure calibration for instruments controlled a PLC or data logger The selected item is shown by lt gt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Digital Input Settings gt select relay gt Instrument State gt Calibration Inputs Event Inputs The Event Inputs menu is an extension of calibration inputs used to trigger actions that are tied to the selected digital input These events are those defined in the calibration sequence menu which are used to create the two calibration sequences Refer to Appendix E for associated information The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main
318. ow the previous steps in reverse Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Sample Flow Switch Replacement Sample Flow Switch Replacement A 7 30 Model 60i Instruction Manual f Electrochemical 0 Sensor Je Assy optional t 3 Way Cal Valve Cal Flow Switch Figure 7 13 Replacing the 3 Way Cal Solenoid Flow Switch Assembly and Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Use the following procedure to replace the sample flow switch Figure 7 14 Equipment Required Sample flow switch Cutting pliers Open end wrench 9 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the sample flow switch cable from the FLOW connector on the measurement interface board Figure 7 14 Cut the sample flow switch cable ties as appropriate Thermo Fisher Scientific Sample Flow Swit
319. oz or Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 25 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures 4 26 Model 60 Instruction Manual another compatible calibration system Note also that on the 61ioz calibrator cylinder 6 must used as the NO source Note A Purge event is a period of time of at the end of a calibration when the zero and span gases are shut off but the system has not re stabilized on actual sample Data taken during the Purge period is flagged as part of the calibration in the instrument s internal records and can also be marked by a data logger that is connected to the 607 rear panel I O system A 5 Set the Delay The delay is the estimated time required for the calibration gas to reach the analyzer and generate a stable response During the delay the zero or span gas will be flowing but the instrument readings will not be stable so the data is not used for calibration 6 Set the Duration The duration is the time period or length of the specific event that is being defined The appropriate value depends on the length of sampling lines pumping rate and other site dependent factors Zero span and purge durations should be sufficiently long that they allow the analyzer reading to fully stabilize 7 Go to the next Event and repeat defining or editing the event as described in the previous step Events that will not be used in a calibration sequence can be left undefined or left with the default definitions Thermo
320. p is set to remain on e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Chiller Alarm gt Zero Air Purge Water Slip Alarm The Water Slip Alarm menu can be used to shut off the system pump or perform a zero air purge when a water slip alarm is detected Refer to System Pump Control Setup above e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Water Slip Alarm Turn System Pump Off The Turn System Pump Off screen is used to toggle between Yes or No as to whether the system pump should shut off when a water slip alarm is detected e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Water Slip Alarm Turn Sys Pump Off Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Range Units Menu Zero Air Purge The Zero Air Purge screen is used to toggle between Yes or No as to whether the system is purged with zero air when a water slip alarm is detected When the zero air purge feature is enabled the 61 sends zero air to the probe to flush the sample line and the 60 if the system pump is set to remain on e Inthe Main Menu choose System gt Service gt Actions on Alarm gt Water Slip Alarm Zero Air Purge R Units M The Range Units menu is used to select the concentration units for each of ange Units Menu the gases that can be measured except oxygen and to configure output ranges for analog outputs used to t
321. pan NO2 automatically When supplying gases by methods other than the 617oz refer to the Manual Calibration notes in this procedure Main Menu Note If using this procedure cylinder 6 must contain the NO span gas If not calibrating NOx another gas may be defined in cylinder 6 A v Calibration This calibration procedure involves M e Spanning the NO channel Span NOx e Mixin with air ozonator Off to measure dilution Y Mixing NO with air Off dil Prompt for e Turning the ozonator On to generate NO NO e Measuring the decrease in concentration of NO v Span NO e isa iA based on mass balance decrease in NO 2 v Prompt Tor 9s Note NO span gas must be supplied throughout this procedure A Y pan g PP g P Measure NOJ NOT 1 Cylinder 6 MUST contain the NO span gas Define cylinder 6 as NO Y span gas by entering the NO concentration in the cylinder definition S NO table For step by step instructions on entering cylinder definitions pan 7 refer to the Define Cylinders menu on page 3 29 2 From the Main Menu select Calibration gt Span gt Calibrate NOx The NOx Calibration screen displays a message indicating that cylinder 6 must be defined as NO span gas 3 I NO channel was already spanned press to skip to the NOx Calibration screen Step 7 otherwise continue with Step 4 4 Press to display the Span screen The screen display
322. paramagnetic oxygen sensor Model 60 Instruction Manual 8 5 Component Description Hardware Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor 0 Sensor Capillary 3 Way Cal Valve and 2 Way Cal Out Valve 2 Way Cal Out Valve Cal Flow Switch 8 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual The optional electrochemical oxygen sensor determines the oxygen concentration by measuring the rate of an oxidation reduction reaction that occurs in a closed cell that is exposed to the sample stream The cell is similar to a battery in construction and consists of an enclosure that holds two electrodes The negatively charged cathode which is also called the working electrode is formed from a flat PTFE tape coated with an active catalyst The positively charged anode is formed from a block of lead The entire cell is sealed from exposure to the atmosphere and is filled with conductive electrolyte that allows transfer of ionic species between the two electrodes The two electrodes are connected to pins that protrude from the bottom of the assembly which allow the sensor to be electrically connected to the instrument This sensor has a limited lifetime of approximately one year under optimal usage conditions Although the optional paramagnetic oxygen sensor operates on a different principal than the electrochemical sensor it provides similar functionality The selectivity of the paramagnetic measurement for oxygen minimizes interference from ot
323. pecified by eventno The following example reports that the duration of event 8 is 120 seconds Model 60 Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Model 60i Instruction Manual Send event duration 8 Receive event duration 8 120 set event duration eventno duration This command sets the duration in seconds duration of a specified event eventno The following example sets the duration of event 8 to 120 seconds Send set event duration 8 120 Receive set event duration 8 120 ok event run eventno This command will run the specified event eventno If the analyzer is not in sample mode or another event is already running it will report wrong settings The following example will run event 8 Send set event run 8 Receive set event run 8 ok autocal check sequence mode This command reports whether the autocal check sequence lor 2 is in check mode where mode is On or Off The following example reports that the autocal check 1 is not enabled Off The autocal check 2 command operates in the same manner as the autocal check 1 command Send autocal check 1 Receive autocal check 1 off set autocal check sequence mode onoff onoff on off This command enables On or disables Off the autocal check for sequence 1 or 2 The following example enables the autocal check 1 On Send set autocal check 1 on Receive set autocal check 1 on ok autocal freq sequence This command re
324. pment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing IR Source Replacement before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the two cover screws holding the IR source cover to the source housing window assembly and remove the IR source cover Figure 7 9 Note that one of these screws secures the thermistor cable 3 Usinga clean cotton swab moistened with distilled water insert the swab into the source housing and clean the window by spinning the swab while applying gentle pressure on the window Figure 7 10 Repeat using a dry cotton swab Either gently blow compressed air into the housing to dry the window or allow sufficient time to air dry before installing the new IR source 4 Loosen both clamp screws from the IR source mounting posts and remove IR source Figure 7 9 5 Install a new IR source by following the previous steps in reverse Ensure that the IR source element is evenly spaced between the mounting posts Allow 24 hours for burn in before continuing with the next step 6
325. ports the run frequency of autocal sequence 1 or 2 in seconds The following example reports that the run frequency of autocal 1 sequence is 86400 seconds Send autocal freq 1 Receive autocal freq 1 86400 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set autocal freq sequence seconds This command sets the run frequency of the autocal 1 or 2 sequence in seconds The following example sets the run frequency of autocal 1 sequence to 86400 seconds Send set autocal freq 1 86400 Receive set autocal freq 1 86400 ok autocal action sequence eventno This command reports which event is assigned for action number eventno in autocal sequence 1 or 2 The following example reports that the event number 8 is assigned for action number 2 in the autocal 1 sequence Send autocal action 1 2 Receive autocal action 1 2 8 set autocal action sequence eventno event This command sets the action number eventno 1 10 to event number event 1 16 for autocal sequence 1 or 2 Omitting event or using the value 0 will set this action to perform no event The following example sets event number as the action number for event number 6 in the autocal 1 sequence Send set autocal action 1 4 6 Receive set autocal action 1 4 6 ok mp table gasname This command lists the points in the multipoint linearization table for the specified gasname where gasname is the name of the selected gas CO CO NO
326. priate value depends on the system design parameters such as sample line length and pumping rate e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Probe Blowback Schedule gt Purge Duration Calibration The Calibration Diagnostics menu is used to access calibration diagnostic 8 8 Diagnostics information for troubleshooting or monitoring instrument performance e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Diagnostics Calibration History The Calibration History screen is used to view a list that shows the date time and type of the most recent calibration events e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Diagnostics gt Calibration History To see a detailed report on any event use Ce J 4 to scroll to an event and press Ce A screen will appear that shows the type of event zero or span the time and date of that event the reference intensity that was measured during 3 42 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu zeros and the cylinder that was used in the event Note that a span history will also display an M or S to indicate multigas span or single gas span The data that is reported in the calibration history screens can be used to track basic instrument functions and to help identify calibration problems that may occur due to instrument failure For example a sudden drop in reference intensity suggests that the source or
327. procedures e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 1 e Set Up on page 2 2 e Startup on page 2 9 e Shutdown on page 2 9 e Important Tips on page 2 9 Lifting When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear f Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or external fittings A Unpacking and Carefully unpack and inspect the instrument in a non condensing environment 15 35 C Check for possible damage during shipment Inspection Remove packing material and any shipping screws Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Set Up Set Up Setting up the instrument involves e Connecting Gas Lines e Making Data and I O Connections e Connecting Power Connecting Gas Por information about connecting gas lines to the Model 60 refer to Lines Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 and Table 2 1 Figure 2 1 indicates the numbered steps that are described in Tabl
328. put Channel 6 Calibration Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications AVA Pin 1 Pin 20 Co e 25 Pin 3 Digital Input Channel 1 P Pin 4 Digital Input Channel 2 Pin 6 Digital Input Channel 5 Pin 7 Digital Input Channel 7 XXXV 50 60 Z 300w ch X XA 250V Rew SX Figure E 4 Digital Inputs Rear Panel Pinouts The 60 allows the user to perform a multigas span a single gas span and to zero the analyzer Refer to this section Table E 3 for an example of how calibration events are triggered Figure E 5 and Figure E 6 show examples of I O status during manual calibration and output status during autocal Figure E 5 shows that the digital inputs are used to trigger three events as well as flag instrument data as invalid after the calibration has completed purge The event trigger digital inputs will request that the instrument runs the corresponding event on the rising edge of the input If the instrument is in a state that allows events to run it will begin immediately The purge output not only mirrors the purge input but it is also asserted during the delay portion of events to indicate that the current readings match neither the sample gas nor the calibration gas The cylinder outputs are asserted when the instrument is requesting gas from the corresponding cylinder Whether the Model 61 is used or a custom system th
329. py scr to sp 2 Receive set copy scr to sp 2 ok list scr screen This command lists the 10 items in user screen where screen is between 1 and 5 inclusive All items are listed regardless of their display The following example lists the 10 items in user screen 2 Send list scr 2 Receive list scr 2 ok field index variable 2 co 3 co2 4 no 5 no2 6 so2h 7 so2l 7 8 h2o 8 12 n20h 9 1 refl of items 2 title CO AND CO2 CONCENTRATIONS state active NN KR N r Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 set addr dns address This command sets the dns address where address consists of four numbers gt ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is On Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send addr gw Receive addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr
330. quest Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo Quantity of Outputs Hi Quantity of Outputs Lo Hex 0x01 0x00 0x02 0x00 0x0D Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 0x0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value OxCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read holding input registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first Registers marked with an asterisk are 32
331. r to Calibrating NO NO2 and NOx on page 4 29 A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Span Pr aT Ph Fm EE Prid YU riii Calibrate NOx The Calibrate NOx selection is used to perform a span adjustment on the NO channel using an ozone based NO generator located in the Model 61ioz calibrator Selecting this will open a series of screens that step through the span procedure for systems using an NO generator rather than an NO cylinder For a full description of this procedure refer to the Calibration chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Span Calibrate NOx Press to span NO or press 9 to skip to the next step if NO has already been spanned Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Calibration Menu Span 0 Sensor 3 26 Model 60 Instruction Manual When Span O is selected the display shows the oxygen concentration that is currently being measured along with the actual oxygen concentration of the span cylinder as entered in the cylinder definition screen Note that since multiple cylinders are likely to contain oxygen the oxygen span cylinder must be specifically designated during calibration setup Main Menu gt Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Select O2 Span Cylinder If the optional Model 61 Calibrator is being used the cylinder designated as the oxygen span source will be opened when this screen is displayed Ifa digital output is
332. rack concentration readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Units co p HOM Pil pihe fiini Select Units The Select Units screen is used to configure how the concentration is expressed for CO CO NO and the SO group Depending on the specific gas units of parts per million ppm milligrams per cubic meter mg m or percent 96 may be available 3 18 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Units Menu Select a gas by pressing Jor then step through the available units by pressing the Ce or gt Items that have been changed will display a to the right until the new settings are saved Changes can be saved by pressing or can be cancelled by pressing gt or Note When switching the selected units the instrument s analog ranges all default to the highest range Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings A Table 3 2 lists the options available for each gas Note The units selected for NO will apply to both NO and NO at other locations in the firmware A Table 3 2 Types of Selections Available for Select Units Menu Items Gas Selections Available CO ppm mg m C0 ppm mg m 96 NO ppm mg m S0 ppm mg m e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Units Select Units Set Analog Ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific The Set Analog Ranges screen defines the scaling or concentration range o
333. ration Service Menu To display the Calibrate Zero and the Calibrate Full Scale functions press to scroll to a channel and press Ce The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen is used to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog output Connect a meter to the output and adjust Set To until the meter matches the Set Output To reading of 0 0 V for a voltage channel or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range The Set Output To field on the display will show what the meter should read e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen is used to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog output Connect a volt meter to the output and adjust output until it reads the value shown in the Set Output To field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 111 Operation Service Menu Lock Analog Outputs Analog Out Lock 3 112 Model 60i Instruction Manual Type e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Cal Select Channel Calibrate Full Scale The Lock Analog Outputs screen is used to enable disable triggering of analog output lock When the analog output lock is on the analog outputs will hold their values as designated by the analog lock type See Analog Out Lock Type for more information e Inthe Main Menu choose S
334. re both available the calibration procedures described earlier should be followed If a stable source of NO is not readily available it may be necessary to span the NO channel using a certified cylinder and to span the NO channel using an ozonator that converts NO to NO When spanning the NO channel with an ozonator system the span concentration for NO is calculated based on the decrease in NO concentration that occurs when ozone is added to the NO span gas Generating NO If NO calibration gas standards are not available the optional 617oz Calibrator or similar device may be used as an alternative supply of NO span gas The 61 0z mixes NO calibration gas with ozone O3 to generate NO NO O gt NO O The ozonator reaction is actually less than 100 efficient resulting in a certain amount of NO pass through The amount of NO generated cannot be accurately predicted However the NO concentration can be calculated Since the total NOx concentration leaving the ozonator must equal the concentration of NO entering the ozonator the increase in NO is equal to the loss of NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 29 Calibration Calibrating NO NO2 and NOx with an Ozonator Calibrating NO with a Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel manually using a f Model 61 oz Calibrator See Defining Calibration Sequence earlier in Model 61ioz Calibrator this chapter to Sapn NOx s
335. re on off B 52 time Reports sets current time 24 hour time B 38 tz Reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server B 47 units Reports sets the display units for the selected gas B 33 up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 31 user scr active Reports sets the active state of user screen B 39 user scr items Reports sets the number of items on user screen B 39 user scr title Reports sets the user screen title B 38 zero Sets gas mode to zero B 52 zero cyl Reports sets the cylinder used for zeroing B 25 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Measurements Alarms B 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual avg time This command reports the concentration measurement averaging time in seconds The following example shows that the averaging time is 60 seconds Send avg time Receive avg time 60 sec set avg time seconds This command sets the concentration measurement averaging time in seconds Valid values are 10 30 60 120 and 300 The following example sets the averaging time to 60 seconds Send set avg time 60 Receive set avg time 60 ok co co2 no no2 nox so2 o2 These commands report the current concentration of the specified gas in basic gas units The following example reports the current O2 concentration as 2 090E 08 ppb Send 02 Receive 02 2 090E 08 ppb alarm temp src min alarm temp src max These commands report the source temperature alarm minimum and maximum value curr
336. recs and the maximum number of lrecs that can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the lrecs and srecs logging period The following example shows that the srec logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec per 5 min set srec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the lrecs and srecs logging period to va ue in minutes The following example sets the lrec logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 60i Instruction Manual no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of lrec and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 lrecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for lrecs and srecs to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for
337. ription Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC EE WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Thermo Fisher Scientific Where to Get Help Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual Where to Get Help For additional assistance worldwide service is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Toll Free U S only 1 866 282 0430 U S Latin America and Canada 1 508 520 0430 Europe 431 76 579 5555 China 86 10 8419 3588 Asia Pacific 91 22 27781102 Model 60i Instruction Manual v About This Manual Where to Get Help vi Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Principle Ol Operation estee san ll dhe 1 2 Specie OBS ui is il ades Moules satus 1 10 Chapter 2 Installation anorani aoaia inaidai iaeiaiai 2 1 ME ose SR oped CoD OR ae i ER iaa 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection Jic a 2 1 Scd e UPS 2 2 Gonnectine Gas Lines oun aro a eR etre PRU DURO iras 2 2 Making Data and I O C obnectons s estesa ipie diete 2 4 Connecting POWER ies ue tete desine mine aa pese a 2 9 STAMP soso e nadie aio 2 9 Sint dm 2 9 a ON 2 9 Chapter 3 lr A 3 1 rr A aR AE EA nea nl aa 3 1 Pushbuttons 5 A ede arcs T eee
338. river Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard and filter from the rear of the instrument by unsnapping it 3 Disconnect the fan power cable from the fan Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing DC Power Supply Replacement 4 Remove the four fan mounting screws along with nuts and washers and remove the fan 5 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse order A AN ZN Filter Mounting Screws 4 Fan Guard Figure 7 16 Replacing the Fan DC Power Supply Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required DC power supply Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the inst
339. rn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast C Link command to set screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A For additional assistance worldwide service is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific Contact us at one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Toll Free U S only 1 866 282 0430 U S Latin America and Canada 1 508 520 0430 Europe 43176 579 5555 China 86 10 8419 3588 Asia Pacific 91 22 27781102 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 8 Component Description This chapter describes the function and location of the hardware components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electroni
340. roing value to number where value is either Oz ir or all and number denotes the cylinder number from 1 to 6 The following example sets cylinder 2 as the cylinder to use for zeroing ir Send set zero cyl ir 2 Receive set zero cyl ir 2 ok span conc number This command reports the span concentrations of gases in cylinder number where number is the number of the cylinder 1 6 The following example reports the span concentrations for cylinder 1 Send Span conc 1 Receive span conc 1 CO 20000 0000 Co2 150000 0000 set span conc number gas value This command sets the concentration of gas in span cylinder number to value where gas is the concentration of gases in the cylinder number is the number of the span cylinder 1 6 and value is the concentration in ppb The following example sets the CO concentration in span cylinder 1 to 20000 ppb Send set span conc 1 co 20000 Receive set span conc 1 co 20000 ok span cylinder This command reports the cylinder used for spanning The following example reports that cylinder 2 is the cylinder used for spanning Send span cylinder Receive span cylinder 2 Model 60 Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 26 Model 60 Instruction Manual set span cylinder number This command sets the cylinder to use for spanning to number where number is a number from 1 6 The following example sets cylinder 2 as the cylinder used for spanning Send set span
341. rovide greater flexibility the firmware allows the operator to define two different calibration sequences that can be utilized at different times For example calibration sequence 1 might include only a zero adjustment and could be programmed to occur automatically every 24 hours while sequence 2 might include both a zero and a span adjustment that would occur only when specifically requested by the operator To implement a calibration sequence the operator first defines the composition of the span gas cylinders as described previously in this chapter and then defines a series of events that constitute the calibration sequence Once a sequence and all timing variables are defined the analyzer can also be programmed to perform the calibration routine automatically at a pre set time Alternately the operator can trigger a calibration sequence as needed from the front panel with a signal from a PLC or data logger or through the analyzer s RS 232 Ethernet communication system e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup Cal Sequence Selecting Cal Sequence 1 or Cal Sequence 2 displays the Sequence menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Calibration Menu Check Reset Cal Flow Path 3 34 Model 60 Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Cal Sequence Setup gt Cal Sequence 1 en Py Tce DE DEhi
342. ruction B Head Screws Pe te e amp cover plug P L A Headplate Optional D Velveplate L Where used max torque for pin screw 25 N cm 2 2 Ibf in E 3 C Intermediate Plate Optional Head Locating Pin Reassemble Using F Diaphragm EXACT QUANTITY d _ of Partsas J Shim i Originally Supplied im Rings a V gt ii Diaphragm Ng DS Support Cup G Quantity may vary Ng K Spring Washer A C L 9e M Connecting Rod Parts for all possible configurations shown your pump may differ Single head shown for clarity Head orientation may differ from above Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the DC Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual Preventive Maintenance DC Pump Rebuilding 5 8 Model 60 Instruction Manual 10 11 Using the pick or a small screwdriver carefully remove the two cover plugs over P then remove the two socket head screws P and washers with the Allen wrench Remove the four screws B and remove the headplate A Note the positioning of the valve plates D and seal rings E in relation to the valve ports on the headplate A and intermediate plate C Lift off the seal rings and valve plates Remove the intermediate plate C Carefully clean the head and intermediate plates of any residue using fine steel wool DO NOT scratch the parts Using the pick or a small screwdriver loosen the edges
343. rument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 7 36 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Testing Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and shift the power supply slightly toward the rear panel then lift out the power supply Power Supply Captive Screw Figure 7 17 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 Remove the four screws holding the mounting bracket to the power supply Note orientation of the power supply on the mounting bracket to facilitate remounting 5 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Analog Output Testing 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 ident
344. rver in the Communication Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT set tz string This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen description in the Operation chapter Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example reports current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 12 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 12 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Model 60 Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 48 Model 60i Instruction Manual Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 12 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range
345. s Note Consult with a network engineer or system administrator for information about making the appropriate Ethernet connection for your application A PC PLC DCS 62i Probe Control optional RS 232 485 Ethernet Standard 0 AC Power Plumbing Connectors t 61i Calibrator Connector optional Digital Outputs e e m Model 60 c n A LO fog ANALYZER CAL T L Model 61 E 2 Model 60i Instruction Manual Figure E 1 Rear Panel Connectors Terminal Block Component Side Viewed from Top of Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications Establishing This section provides information on the methods available for retrieving system data accessing system status conditions initiating system events Communications and calibrating the analyzer Check Readings The 60 provides several methods for retrieving system data including e MODBUS read register e C Link commands e Analog output connections Refer to Table E 1 for the default analog output assignments associated rear panel pinouts and the MODBUS and C link methods for retrieving data Refer to Figure E 2 to locate the pins on the rear panel connector Note For purposes of this example analo
346. s instrument Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102562 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard with all instruments 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard with all instruments Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Part Number Description 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M optional Included with optional I O Expansion Board in all instruments Partition DC Pump Measurement Interface Board GN E CC E Os Or ES B D zr e gem E dete e Sample Flow Switch
347. s abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or CR If a command is terminated with lt ETX gt then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Check Characters BCC may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Geysitech Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with CR no checksum is attached The block checksum is r
348. s before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board if present 3 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel 5 Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 19 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Measurement Interface Board Replacement 7 50 Model 60i Instruction Manual be worn while handling any internal component If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Replacement procedure in this chapter
349. s command reports 8 hexidecimal digits or flags that represent alarm status To decode the flags each hexidecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in Figure B 1 The binary digits define the status of each parameter Send alarm flags Receive alarm flags 00000000 e Fla digit ks PPS n vel bin ar A E rsion tabl o jt o ji oo 3310 0 o xl C JIE xl C L ig us LL Lo iy LL LL ja ES VI pU CE et Not PO CO Concentratior Ref Intensity E u8g Concentratior Bench Alarrr NO Concentratior Detector Temp NO2 Concentration Internal Temp NOx Concentration Pressure O2 Concentratior sample Fl SO concentration Alarm Statu No Alarm abl Alarm ALARI TATUS 6 High Alarm LOCO TRANSLATOR Fail REV Figure B 1 Alarm Flag Status Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual sys alarm probe filter temp min sys alarm probe filter temp max These commands report the system probe filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example that follows reports that the system probe filter temperature alarm minimum value is 70 E Send sys alarm probe f
350. s include all analog outputs six voltage channels and six current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs Py PTET DH uM LAir Piim EA 3 90 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage or current zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts or to the minimum current setting of 4 mA and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 EH nid Instrument The Instrument Configuration screen displays instrument hardware Configuration configuration information which is set at the factory and is based on what ardware is present and whether or not the analyzer is part of a system Note If the analyzer is in Service Level mode pressing will toggle the selected item between YES and NO except for the O2 sensor which toggles between PM paramagnetic EC electrochemical and NONE A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Instr
351. s the actual and measured NO values Manual Calibration Turn NO gas on before pressing 9 in Step 5 5 Press 9 to begin the span 4 30 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific References Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration References 6 When the timer elapses press to save the NO span value 7 Press 9 to begin dilution The analyzer flows dilution air through the ozonator which is off The NOxX Calibration screen displays the time remaining before the NO and NO values can be saved Manual Calibration Turn on NO with air source 8 When the timer elapses press This time is Duration if using an automated sequence The analyzer stores the NO and NO values that were derived with the ozonator off The ozonator turns on and the NOx Calibration screen displays the Ozonator is Active message Manual Calibration Turn on ozonator 9 Wait for the timer to indicate that the analyzer is ready to store the values This is Duration B if using an automated sequence Press to store the NO and NO values These values are used to calculate the NO span coefficient The screen displays the Waiting for Calc message then returns to the Calibrate Span screen Manual Calibration Turn off ozonator 1 Section 12 of EPA 454 R 98 004 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Part 1 August 1998 available at www epa gov ttn amtic qabook html a
352. s used to specify the number of points to be used in the linearization for the selected gas not including zero air Up to 10 points can be used e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Lin Setup gt select an enabled gas gt No of Points Press _ Jor to increment decrement the number of points and press to save the setting The Setup Points screen is used to adjust the measured response of the instrument to the known value of the associated gas standard By stepping through the desired number of points a table is created that correlates the analyzer s response to a series of gas standards of known concentration This table will be used to improve linearity Values appearing in the Measured column are derived from the instrument s response to the gas Values appearing in the Actual column are entered by the user and represent the know gas concentration The Live row displays the current measured value and the known concentration of the standard The Stored row displays the most recently saved measured and known values It is important to note that the measured concentration won t match the actual concentration thus the need for linearization The reason for the stored and live measured value is that the two should agree if the supplied span gas and the instrument s response to it are stable Once save is pressed the measured value is stored After a minute or so the live value should be the same as the s
353. screens are used to change the minimum and maximum umbilical temperature zone 1 alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Umb Temp Zone 1 Min or Max DH sued MAPA The Blowback Pressure screen displays the current blowback pressure and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable limits are O to 100 psi e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Blowback Pressure The Min and Max Blowback Pressure alarm limit screens are used to change the minimum and maximum blowback pressure alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Blowback Pressure screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Blowback Pressure gt Min or Max 4 ERE Du ITI USES I PC Bat ade DEB FPE Service Menu The Service menu provides access to all critical operating and configuration parameters and advanced diagnostic functions Access to Service menus should usually be restricted to trained service technicians since changes in this portion of the firmware can result in instrument malfunctions that could be difficult to diagnose and correct The Service Level mode locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems with t
354. sequence Event 1 occurs first in the sequence and can be assigned any event in the list of up to 16 defined events See Defined Events that follows Event 2 occurs second in the sequence and can be assigned any event and so on As described in the Operation chapter an event corresponds to a single step in the overall calibration sequence For example zeroing the O2 sensor is one calibration event A sequence can contain up to 10 events which are chosen from the list of 16 defined calibration events The most common events are pre defined in the 60 firmware as shown in Table 4 3 Existing events can be viewed or edited and new events can be created by using the Define Events menu as described in the following section and in the Operation chapter Note Events 12 16 in Table 4 3 default to purge but are intended to be user defined A Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 23 Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures IMPORTANT If Span NO Span NO is selected as an event in the sequence it MUST be preceded by a Span NO event or the NO calibration may not be accurate Also cylinder 6 MUST be the NO cylinder A 5 If necessary step back to the Cal Sequence Setup menu select Cal Sequence 2 and define a second sequence using Steps 2 through 4 Table 4 3 Default Calibration Events Event No Description Cylinder Delay Duration min min 1 Zero both NA note 1 5 5 2 Zero 0 NA
355. shooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20 Model 60 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin cO a N oo A CO gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Oo a 99 N Signal Description NC NC Ground 5V NC NC Ground 02 SENSOR INPUT B 02 SENSOR THERMISTOR INPUT NC 5V SOL BD cO a N O o A CO N 5V 24V Fused 24V Fused Ground Ground Ground Reset NC SPI Data Out SPI Solenoid Control SPI Clock Z S 24V Zero Span Solenoid Control SAMPLE 24V Sample Solenoid Control SPAN1 24V Converter Solenoid Control SPAN2 J20 24V Span 2 Solenoid Control FAN J21 24V Fused Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 Ground FAN SW F22 24V Fused 2 Fan On Off Control FAN PWM F23 24V Fused 2 Fan PWM Control DC PUMP F27 24V Fused 2 Ground Table 6 7 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram Connector Label MOTHERBOARD Thermo Fisher Scientific Reference Designator J1 Pin o CO N O Ol A CO N gt gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a 99 N N N N N a O Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Sign
356. ss Pressing Cm before the adjustment process is complete will terminate the span factor adjustment without saving changes e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Span gt Cylinder 1 6 a jas RUE MT Bams EN EEE E a P3 eld Re 4 PEG Calibrate The Calibrate menu allows the operator to trigger one of two full calibration sequences that can include zero and span adjustments for any or all measurement channels The sequence of calibration events is identical to Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Calibration Menu 3 28 Tr the sequence that would be triggered by the Auto Cal function and is controlled by parameters located in the calibration setup menu that follows e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate Use the cursor to select either run sequence press to display the associated screen then press to start the sequence Standing By changes to Running when the sequence starts RUM E PRESS TO UO Md Calibration Setup Model 60 Instruction Manual The Calibration Setup menu is used to e Enter information that describes the contents of the gas cylinders that will be used for span calibration e Select which cylinders will be used as the zero for the optional oxygen sensor and infrared bench and as the span for the O sensor e Select between the direct calibration of the analyzer and the system calibration e Reset the zero backgro
357. status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Dewpoint Pressure The Pressure screen is used to view the current bench pressure reading and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 250 to 1000 mm Hg An alarm is activated if the pressure reading is outside the set limits and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Pressure Min and Max Pressure Limits The Min and Max Pressure alarm limit screens are used to change the minimum and maximum alarm pressure limits The Minimum and Maximum Pressure screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 95 Operation Alarms Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Other Alarms gt Pressure gt Min or Max Ref Intensity The Ref Intensity screen read only displays the measurement of the source intensity e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Other Alarms Ref Intensity ip sub PLP Bench Temperature The Bench Temperature screen displays the bench temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 40 to 55 C If the bench temperature reading is outside the set limits an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu
358. t 5 Define Events O System Calibration Calibration Worksheet Note Events require external hardware such as the 61 oz Calibrator A Event Event Event Delay Duration Notes Type Sub type min min 1 2 3 4 5 6 Jj 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 35 Calibration Calibration Worksheet 4 36 Model 60 Instruction Manual 6 Setup Auto Cal Sequence Note Events require external hardware such as the 617oz Calibrator A O Check O Reset Auto Cal Sequence Event Order Defined Event Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Completed Worksheet Example Completed Worksheet This completed calibration worksheet indicates the types of data used in setting up a calibration Example Facility Thermo Fisher Scientific Franklin MA USA Sample Location Unit 1 inlet Instrument Serial Number 00001850 Installation Date July 2 2007 Operator D Mackintosh 1 Define Cal Cylinders Cylinder Components Concentrations 1 02 Instrument Air 2 002 02 nats and 10 O2 balance 3 CO S02 NO 750 ppm CO 750 ppm SO2 375 xS ppm NO balance nitrogen 4 S02 750 ppm SO2 balance nitrogen 5 N02 40 ppm NO2 balance air 6 NO 375 ppm NO balance nitrogen 2 Select Zero Cylinders Parameter Cylinder ZERO 02 3
359. t System Alarms gt Probe Filter Temp Min or Max Di YU 3 100 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Probe Barrel Temperature The Probe Barrel Temperature screen displays the current probe barrel temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 200 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Probe Barrel Temp EH DHOBM Min and Max Probe Barrel The Min and Max Probe Barrel Temperature alarm limit screens are used Temperature Limits to change the minimum and maximum probe barrel temperature alarm limits The Minimum and Maximum Probe Barrel Temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt System Alarms gt Probe Barrel Temp Min or Max Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 The Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 screen displays the current umbilical Zone 1 temperature and the minimum and maximum alarm limits The Umbilical Temperature Zone 2 screen functions the same way Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 200 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms System Alarms Umb Temp Zone 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 3 101 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 Limits Blowback Pressure Min and Max Blowback Pressure Limits 3 102 Model 60i Instruction Manual The Min and Max Umbilical Temperature Zone 1 alarm limit
360. t When the event halt bit is reported as 1 it indicates that the currently running event Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration or sequence has been stopped The following example reports that the currently running event or sequence has been stopped Send event halt Receive event halt 1 set event halt This command stops the currently running event or sequence by setting the event halt control bit This control bit is reset to 0 after the event is halted Send set event halt Receive set event halt ok flow This command reports the status of the flow switch as OK or flow low Send flow Receive flow ok pres comp This command reports the current setting for pressure compensation The example that follows shows that the pressure compensation is set to Off no pressure compensation Send pres comp Receive pres comp off set pres comp onoff This command sets the pressure compensation to onoff where On is pressure compensation On and Offis pressure compensation Off Send set pres comp on Receive set pres comp on ok pres This command reports the bench pressure in mm Hg The first pressure shown is the pressure value being used in instrument calculations The second pressure shown is the actual pressure reading being measured Send pres Receive pres 738 8 mm Hg actual 738 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration
361. t 5 Equipment Required Bench thermistor assembly Heat conductive compound Flatblade screwdriver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver small Cutting pliers T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Detector Board Assembly Replacement must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the optical bench assembly following the Optical Bench Replacement procedure described previously in this chapter 3 Turn the optical bench over remove the screw holding the thermistor to the bottom of the optical bench and remove the thermistor assembly Figure 7 5 Cut cable ties as necessary 4 Apply heat conductive compound to the thermistor and install the new thermistor into the bench 5 Reinstall the bench as described previously and plug the connectors into the appropriate locations Detector Board Use the following procedure to replace the detector assembly Refer to Assembly Replacement 7 14 Model 60i Instruction Manual A Figure 7 6 and Figure 7 7 Eq
362. t assignments associated rear panel pinouts and the MODBUS and C link methods for initiating system events Refer to Figure E 4 to locate the pin on the rear panel connector Note For purposes of this example Table E 3 and Figure E 4 show only some of the available 16 digital inputs A Note For purposes of this example digital input 1 was configured to trigger Event 1 Zero all IR channels however you must configure your digital inputs to trigger events for your particular application A Table E 3 Triggering Events via MODBUS C Link or Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Description MODBUS C Link No Rear Panel Write Coil Command 1 Pin3 Event 1 Zero all IR channels 109 event run 1 2 Pin4 Event 2 Span CO 0 Cyl 2 110 event run 2 3 Pin 23 Event 3 Span CO S02 NO Cyl 3 1 event run 3 4 Pin 24 Event 4 Zero 0 Cyl 4 12 event run 4 5 Pin 6 Event 5 Span SO 113 event run 5 6 Pin 25 Event 6 Span NO 114 event run 6 7 Pin 7 Event 7 Span NO 115 event run 7 8 Pin 8 Event 8 Zero all IR channels 16 event run 8 9 Pin 27 Event 9 Initiate purge 117 event run 9 10 Pin 9 Purge 125 purge on off 11 P Halt events 132 event halt 12 y Run sequence 1 133 seq run 1 13 T Run sequence 2 134 seq run 2 Not all 16 available digital inputs are shown in this example Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Pin 23 Digital Input Channel 3 Pin 24 Digital Input Channel 4 Pin 25 Digital In
363. t available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Unplug all connectors Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection IMPORTANT Observe the orientation of the chip U9 in the socket and insert the small flat blade screwdriver under the chip and gently pry upwards going from one end of the chip to the other until the chip is free A 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop off the measurement interface board from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board Figure 7 22 4 Position the chip in the proper orientation over the socket on the new measurement interface board and apply a gentle uniform pressure to the chip until it is fully seated in the socket 5 To install the measurement interface board follow previous steps in reverse 6 Re install the measurement case Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Mounting Screws 2
364. t linearization table to be used for linearization for the specified gasname where gasname is the name of the selected gas CO CO NO NO SO and ofpoints is the number of points 2 10 The following example sets five points for SO in the linearization table Send set mp points so2 5 Receive set mp points so2 5 ok mp gasname point This command reports the measured and actual values for the specified gasname and point where gasname is specified gas CO CO NO NOs SO and point is the specified point from the associated multipoint linearization table The following example reports the measured and actual values for point 4 of CO Thermo Fisher Scientific Keys Display Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Send mp CO 4 Receive mp CO 4 400 0 405 0 set mp gasname point measured actual This command sets the measured and actual values for the specified gasname and point where gasname is specified gas CO CO NO NO SO point is the specified point from the associated multipoint linearization table measured is the associated measured value to input and actual is the actual value to input The following example sets the measured value for CO point 3 to 202 1 and the actual value to 200 0 Send set mp CO 3 202 1 200 0 Receive set mp CO 3 202 1 200 0 ok push button do help ri 1 down le right 2 en left ru 3 enter me run 4 he menu up button do down en en
365. t to adjust the span values as prompted by the user To help clarify the calibration procedure refer to e Table 3 4 Cylinder Definition Example on page 3 31 e Performing a Zero Adjustment on page 4 20 e Performing a Span Adjustment on page 4 21 Most of the information provided here is specific to the Model 60 If greater detail is needed concerning data quality issues or CEMS calibration procedures in general please refer to the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Prior to calibration perform the following checks and adjustments to be sure the instrument is operating properly 1 Turn on the instrument and allow it to stabilize for at least two hours 2 Check that there are no alarms shown Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero and Span Frequency Equipment Required Zero Gas Supply Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required 3 Perform any service checks that may be required using the procedures described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter 4 Verify or adjust the analog output range settings to those that will be used during routine operation and set the Averaging Time to at least 60 seconds 5 Before starting the calibration procedure be sure to define the cylinder contents and set calibration parameters such as the zero and span durations and the purge time Note The zero and span duration times must be long enough to account for the transition process whe
366. tandards cnt dps 4 5 Span Gas Concentration sion di 4 5 Cylinder Recerca dd 4 6 O eue edt A SE dt Eee 4 6 Pressure Regulators uocem E 4 7 Gas Delivery E A 4 7 Gas Routing Valve ied ias 4 14 Model 61i Flow Control ion eee ier tede etat eas 4 15 Calibration Gas Flow Rate es ne dac ati i sac aui a ati 4 15 Gas Mixing eS da oo elut ie 4 16 Calibration Process and Procedures aii 4 17 Defining Cylinders iuc tet iuias 4 18 Define Cylind rs ara conte a 4 18 Designating Zero Cy lind ets ics iiec cniin cette ruta 4 18 Designating O2 Span C ylindery sc 20 canoes Melts aay 4 19 Manual Calibration seh Seem tiro n 4 19 Manual Calibration Sequence Overview sss 4 19 Performing a Zero Adjustment agaleteessedetet aleae citas 4 20 Performing a Span Adjustment iaa 4 21 Using Event Sequences with Auto Calibration 4 22 Define Calibration Sequence 1 and or Calibration Sequence 2 4 23 Define Ex a ti 4 25 Scheduling Automatic Calibration ss litis 4 27 Controlling Events Via Third Party Digital I O or MODBUS 4 27 Using Third Party Digital I O or MODBUS without Events or SEQUENCES ii 4 28 Calibrating NO NO and NOx with an Ozonator 4 29 Generating INO 5 sd ceu ep eti uoi 4 29 Calibrating NO with a Model 6110z Calibrator 4 30 O 4 31 Calibration Worksheet ina aa 4 32 Completed Worksheet Example 40d epe tasto iden 4 37
367. te Zero and the Calibrate Full Scale functions press to scroll to a channel and press Tae br Li ik i Analog Input Calibrate Zero The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen is used to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero and disconnect everything from the selected input 3 114 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu prak pruni Ph dm USE CPV PT Oed Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen is used to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal Select Channel Calibrate Full Scale Connect a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel Note If the voltage provided is slightly different from 10 00 V then use the f Jand to enter the voltage in the Set to field A RRS in Bs EEE CIL Setup Run Screens The Setup Run Screens menu is used to define and edit up to five custom Run screens The operator can select what information is shown and how it is presented in each Run screen While in Run mode pressing or to will toggle between the custom Run screens that are turned on if turned off the custome Run screens will not be displayed Please note that any of the screens can be assigned as the start screen
368. te of an oxidation reduction reaction that occurs in a closed cell that is exposed to the sample stream The cell is similar to a battery in construction and consists of an enclosure that holds two electrodes The negatively charged cathode which is also called the working electrode is formed from a flat PTFE tape coated with an active catalyst The positively charged anode is formed from a block of lead The entire cell is sealed from exposure to the atmosphere and is filled with a conductive electrolyte that allows transfer of ionic species between the two electrodes The two electrodes are connected to pins which protrude from the bottom of the assembly which allow the sensor to be electrically connected to the instrument Model 60 Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 6 Model 60 Instruction Manual Capillary Diffusion Barrier Top Plate gt ee Sensing SEE Working Insulator i Electrode Cathode Lead Anode Sensor 7 Base Current Collectors ee Sensor Pins Figure 1 4 Example of an Optional Electrochemical Oxygen Sensor Oxygen entering through the capillary or membrane located above the working electrode reacts with the working electrode to form a negatively charged hydroxyl OH ion as indicated in Equation 1 This ion moves through the electrolyte in the oxygen sensor to the positively charged electrode The OH ion reacts with the
369. ted with a 61 02 Span adjust SO measurement channel with SO in air or nitrogen Refer to the detailed steps that follow for performing each step listed above The Zero Adjust procedure is used to set the analyzer reading to zero while sampling high purity contaminant free gas Zero adjustments need to be performed periodically for both the IR bench and the O sensor l 2 3i Adjust the gas delivery system so that zero gas high purity nitrogen or air is delivered to the sample probe or analyzer Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is obtained As noted previously it may take several minutes to purge and flush the entire calibration system and to clear the instrument s averaging buffer If you do not allow enough time for the system to flush the zero reading will be influenced by readings taken when the instrument was still sampling stack gas From the Main Menu choose Calibration Zero Thermo Fisher Scientific Performing a Span Adjustment Main Menu Y Calibration Y Span Calibrate NOx Span O2 Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 Cylinder 3 Cylinder 4 Cylinder 5 Cylinder 6 y Confirm Cylinder y Stabilize Y Save Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Process and Procedures 4 Select the analytical sub system that you want to calibrate IR bench O sensor or Both The screen shows the se
370. ter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen This command retrieves the frame buffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary c link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int Lily es unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i Model 60 Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Measurement Configuration B 32 Model 60i Instruction Manual if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while
371. th a user supplied PLC or data logger Whatever external hardware is used the flow rate of the calibration gases must be controlled so that it slightly exceeds the total flow required by the analyzer plus any other devices connected to the system The flow rate of the gases is usually controlled by applying a fixed pressure against a fixed flow restrictor or orifice For example if a system that utilizes an external pump running at 5 lpm is being calibrated through the probe system calibration the calibration gases should be delivered at 6 to 8 lpm If the gas routing valve is set to run direct calibrations rather than system calibrations then the calibration gas flow should be set to between 1 5 and 2 0 lpm In either case the calibration hardware must be configured to avoid high gas flows that would pressurize the analytical bench A typical system plumbing arrangement similar to that used in the Thermo Fisher Scientific 60 Series Continuous Emissions Monitoring System is illustrated in Figure 4 6 If the analyzer was purchased as part of a system the probe and or system instructions should also be consulted for specific details Model 60 Instruction Manual 4 15 Calibration Equipment Required Flow Switch A To Vent Ini e i Internal Sample Pump 1 LPM T le d Exhaust Fittin
372. th either CR with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a CR then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string 03 for three measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponentia
373. ther the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Cables Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin ca
374. threshold setting Overheating fan problem Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check resistance of heater wires Unplug heater connector and use an ohmmeter to measure resistance across pins 3 and 4 Normal resistance should be approx 290 Q A higher resistance reading indicates that a heater is defective Checking pins 1 and 2 will result in a 10 k Q reading An open reading indicates a failed thermistor or wiring in heater assembly Reset the alarm threshold Check fan operation Alarm Temp Detector Defective fan Fan not connected properly Dirty fan filter Replace fan if not operating properly Check fan connection Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Alarm Temp Source Defective fan Fan not connected properly Dirty fan filter Source temperature thermistor open or shorted Bad interface board Replace fan if not operating properly Check fan connection Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check source temperature thermistor See Servicing chapter for details Replace interface board Alarm Umb Temp Zone 1 Alarm Umb Temp Zone 2 System alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Umbilical not heating High temp No AC voltage to probe Bad cable connection at instrument Check voltages and continuity Check setpoint Check probe
375. tified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Request Function code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function code Byte count Register value Error Response Function code Exception code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2 x N N quantity of registers N N or N 1 Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Single Coil Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register value Hi 10 0x02 Register value Lo 10 0x2B Register value Hi 11 0x00 Register value Lo 11 0x00 Register value Hi 12 0x00 Register value Lo 12 0x64 Register value Hi 13 0x00 Register value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The force
376. ting C02 Zero 0 Range Setting NO Zero 0 Range Setting N02 Zero 0 Range Setting NOx Zero 0 Range Setting 02 Zero 0 Range Setting S02 Zero 0 Range Setting All Other Measurements User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Choose Signal To Output The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the available analog output signal group choices grouped into Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs and Non Measurements Analog Inputs are available only if the optional I O expansion board is installed This allows the user to assign a specific measurement result or parameter to the selected output channel The Concentrations screen is shown in the following example See Table 3 16 for a list of items for each signal group choice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select channel gt Choose Signal To Output Pop Pia an Base E EYES ERN uie Lid 3b DENN ee i LE y EN EUH Eek Bone PDT Eoropie prim i dra aT t di Lit Lid Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 16 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Analog Inputs Non Measurements Measurements None None None Bench Pres Analog Input 1 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Digin Status Source Temp Analog Input 2 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Units Bench T
377. tion Manual Level The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the NTP time server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via a CLINK command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C link command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone The Model 60 provides three different menu systems or access levels These are designated as Service Level Setup Level and Operator Level The Service Level menu provides access to all critical operating and configuration parameters Service menu Service Level locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 607 Access to Service Level menus should usually be restricted to trained service technicians since changes in this portion of the firmware can result in instrument malfunctions that could be difficult to diagnose and correct
378. tno to type where type is zero span or purge The following example sets event 8 to span Send set event type 8 span Receive set event type 8 span ok event param eventno This command reports the event parameter for the specified event For events of type span the command returns a span cylinder For events of type zero it returns the type of zero The following example reports event 8 is a zero Oo Send event param 8 Receive event param 8 zero o2 ok set event param eventno param This command sets the parameter for event eventno to param For event type of span valid values for param are 1 6 and it represents the cylinder to span from For events of type zero valid values are 1 3 with 1 being zero ir 2 being zero O and 3 being zero all The following example sets event 8 to zero all Send set event param 8 3 Receive set event param 8 3 ok event delay eventno This command reports the delay time in seconds of the event specified by eventno The following example reports that the delay time of event 8 is 120 seconds Send event duration 8 Receive event duration 8 120 set event delay eventno delay This command sets the delay time in seconds delay of a specified event eventno The following example sets the delay time of event 8 to 120 seconds Send set event delay 8 120 Receive set event delay 8 120 ok event duration eventno This command reports the duration in seconds of the event s
379. to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt Descriptor ENORME Cum PTE cu The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt Units Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select channel gt Decimal Places DH Guided MAMA Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage and the units that were selected Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 V and a
380. to edit the instrument identification number ID The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of the same instrument are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 60 has a default instrument ID of 60 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID Geysitech Serial No A Geysitech serial number is included in the response to a Geysitech protocol DA command Refer to Data Sampling Data Query Command DA on page D 4 for detailed information and examples 3 58 Model 60 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Communication Protocol Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Valid Geysitech serial numbers can be set from 0 to 255 A Geysitech serial number defaults to zero To set the Geysitech serial number select Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Geysitech Serial No Dj ry Pi AG Ls The Communication Protocol screen is used to select the communication protocol used for serial communications Possible settings are C link streaming Geysitech and MODBUS C link Protocol C link is a bi directional protocol that provides access to all instrument functions including reading the various concentrations and other analog values or varia
381. to set the lock type to No Lock Note To avoid confusion use only one lock trigger at a time and be aware of the analyzer s calibration state A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Lock Type USE CILE PDT RO ai POE Sek aet PULPuPePG Set Analog Lock When Lock Percent has been selected on the Analog Out Lock Type Percent screen use the Set Analog Lock Percent screen to set the output range percentage The Set Analog Lock Percent screen is used to set the analog output lock percentage to an integer value where value is the percent of the output range that the analog outputs will lock to if locking is active Limits are from 5 to 105 in percent of range For example if the user sets the analog lock percent to 105 then when the analog outputs are locked they will be locked at 10 5 volts if the outputs are set to the 0 10 volt range e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Set Analog Lock Percent A Di Prid YU Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 113 Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the eight analog input channels at both zero and full scale Note This screen is present only when the I O expansion board is installed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal o PILQPUPMPO To display the Calibra
382. tocol Commands Hardware Configuration Level Contrast Level 8 40 9 45 10 50 11 55 12 60 13 65 14 70 15 75 16 80 17 85 18 90 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date The following example reports the date as December 1 2007 Send date Receive date 12 01 07 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to December 1 2007 Send set date 12 01 07 Receive set date 12 01 07 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive set default params ok Model 60 Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration save save params This command stores all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour time The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This comma
383. tored value If it is not wait until the live value appears to have stabilized save again then move on to the next point e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Lin Setup gt select an enabled gas gt Point 1 10 Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 127 Operation Service Menu 3 128 Internal Temperature Calibration Restore Factory Defaults Model 60 Instruction Manual The Internal Temperature Calibration screen is used to view and set the internal temperature sensor offset Note Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Internal Temp Calibration DH HOM PLP The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset user defined parameters such as the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen also resets other parameters such as alarm limits datalogging and I O parameters range units system settings password etc to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via Remote operat
384. treaming data record will include a set of flags that indicate various diagnostic or alarm conditions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Add Flags The Item selection screen shows the operator which data fields will be included in the streaming records and also allow those selections to be edited The editing function operates in a manner that is similar to the Select Content submenu that is used to configure the data logging When the item number is selected the submenu displays a list of data fields that can be included in the streaming records The available fields are organized into the following groups Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs and Non Measurements If the I O board is not present Analog Inputs will not be available e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 ENORME Dum USE Al mi The Concentrations screen lists all the individual gases that the analyzer is equipped to measure Table 3 11 It allows the user to select a concentration reading that will be included in the selected streaming record e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item gt Concentrations Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 11 Data in Streaming Records Concentrat
385. trument Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Thermo Fisher Scientific Read Inputs MODBUS Protocol Function Codes The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 Read Exception Status 0x07 If a function code is received that is not in this list and invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes that follows In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 602 Read Coils Inputs reads the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of
386. trument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Accessing Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user Streaming Data defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet Entering Units in PPB When interfacing to an instrument via C link commands always enter the concentration values in ppb or pg m units For example to set a background value to 20 ppm enter 20000 ppb as the value for the set background command Service Level Mode If the Service Level mode is active C link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands List B 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Table B 2 lists the C Link protocol commands in alphabetical order The interface will respond to the associated command strings Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page addr dns Reports sets dns address B 41 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address B 41 addr ip Reports sets IP address B 41 addr nm Reports sets netmask address B 42 addr ntp Reports the IP a
387. ts When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A 1 Ifcalibrating the paramagnetic sensor remove the cover 2 Make sure the instrument is in Service mode then go to the Service menu 3 Provide 10096 nitrogen to the sample port of the instrument Wait at least 5 minutes for the reading to stabilize Go to the O2 Sensor Calibration Zero screen to read the measurement Thermo Fisher Scientific Fan Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Fan Replacement 4 For the paramagnetic sensor only use a screwdriver to adjust the zero pot on the O sensor so the measurement reads 10 mV For the electrochemical sensor only make sure the measurement reads lt 1 mV Press for either sensor to save the zero calibration 5 Provide 20 9 oxygen to the sample port of the instrument Wait at least 5 minutes for the reading to stabilize Make sure to use room air not zero air through a Balston air dryer because the dryer varies the O2 content Go to the O Sensor Calibration gt Span screen to read the measurement 6 For the paramagnetic sensor only use a screwdriver to adjust the coarse span and fine span pots on the O sensor so the measurement reads 210 mV For the electrochemical sensor only make sure the measurement reads 9 mV Press for either sensor to save the span calibration Use the following procedure to replace the fan Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Fan Philips screwd
388. ts 3 2 Soft d CHR E 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry a s enmt II e E 3 4 Firmware DOVeEVIOW ausi bti ies teas OAM AD IM HER e IIa atol n 3 5 Power Up Screen areenaan eiai decir ode es ceto n neuen 3 7 R n Sc Dd m 3 7 Custom R n Screens nenoras x rastedem senem apttd ruote apa ee pen E 3 8 E trei eot vius aE E RU etras SONA ERROR Neo CHE 3 8 System MED eundi rescate nt a bep een adi ahd wanes aa 3 9 System Controls es abso fessi ern ato Defined be sts 3 9 Component Po Wenn debeo n D Ma iones oe DI tea 3 10 Probe Filter Power iii idas 3 10 Probe Barrel Power omic dia 3 10 Umbilical Zone 1 Powerade dida 3 11 Umbilical Zone 2 Porno lanas 3 11 System Diagnostics said ii 3 11 System PrESSUTES oerte ehe cn Fei end Dee cette 3 12 Dyste noL em perature AA dette o tees esa tura dg 3 12 Interface Board 627 rore tte led laa da 3 12 System Service We tithe db ate dow restet teer decret oad ceps 3 13 Probe Filter Set Temperature 10 oa acte iiie 3 13 Probe Barrel Set Temperature va ass oet estia ud 3 13 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60i Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 60 Instruction Manual Umbilical Zone 1 and Zone 2 Set Temperature 3 14 Calibrator Contro uoce tit 3 14 Blowback Control daas ote id e pelota ete dos 3 15 System Pump Control Setup sucinta ete bene 3 15 Actions on AAR a io 3 16 Chiller ATE i Dira deeds 3 16 Turn System Pump OE A en eet 3 16 Zero due pM EE 3 17 Water Slip Alarm 2 3 decla
389. ts in a mixture using the same basic analytical approach shown in Figure 1 1 However the analyzer design includes a number of unique features which extend the operation beyond that seen in the most basic instruments As shown in Figure 1 3 the Model 60 design replaces the chopper and fixed optical filter with a spinning wheel that contains a series of carefully selected optical filters The filters are separated by a series of metal spokes so that it can function as both a chopper that modulates the IR signal and as a mechanism for rapidly interchanging optical filters In addition the analytical sample cell in the Model 60 is a multi pass design meaning that it contains a series of mirrors that force the beam of radiation to bounce back and forth and make multiple passes through the sample gas before reaching the exit By making multiple passes through the cell the effective path length is increased which increases the opportunity for the IR radiation to interact with the sample and improves the sensitivity of the analyzer Model 60 Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Principle of Operation Absorbance Spectrum of Carbon Monoxide 1 2 0 8 7 0 6 7 Absorbance 0 4 7 0 2 7 25 3 5 45 5 5 6 5 7 5 Wavelength micrometers Absorbance Spectrum of Carbon Dioxide 0 8 0 6 Absorbance 0 4 0 2 25 3 5 45 5 5 6 5 7 5 Wavelength micrometers Figure 1 2 Absorbance Spectra of Carbon Monoxide an
390. uipment Required Detector board assembly Philips screwdriver 2 Cutting pliers Adjustable wrench Heat conductive compound Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Board Assembly Replacement 1 Turn the instrument Off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the detector cable from the connector on the detector board assembly Cut cable ties as necessary 3 Remove the two detector assembly cover retaining screws and remove the cover Figure 7 6 Detector Cover Retaining Screws 2 Standoffs 2 a e Figure 7 6 Removing the Detector Cover 4 Remove the two standoffs and the two panhead Philips screws Figure 7 6 5 Being careful not to pull the leads off the thermistor or detector gently pull the detector board assembly straight up to free it from the O ring seal position the board to gain access to the thermistor retaining screw and remove the screw Figure 7 7 6 Place a small amount of heat conductive compound on the underside of t
391. uirements 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC Q 50 60 Hz 1096 at 275 watts Physical 425mm 16 75 W x 218mm 8 62 H x 584mm 23 D dimensions Weight 22 2kg 49 lbs Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V user selectable 596 of full scale over under range user selectable 12 bit resolution measurement output user selectable per channel Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 digital relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial Ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 data bits parity and stop bits protocols C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data all user selectable Fthernet RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP connection addressing Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Table 1 2 Model 60 Performance Specifications Parameter CO C0 NO NO S0 0 0 EC PM Full Scale 2500 ppm 0 25 2000 ppm 500 ppm 10 000 ppm 0 25 0 25 Range 3000 mg m 500 000 2500 mg m 1000 mg m 25 000 mg m mg m Accuracy 3 2 of full scale or 5 of measured value whichever is smaller 0 2096 0 1096 Zero Noise 0 2 ppm 0 0396 0 2 ppm 0 1 ppm lt 0 1 ppm 0 50 0 50 Limit of 0 5 ppm 0 05 0 5 ppm 0 2 ppm 0 2 ppm 0 20 0 10
392. ulate Filter on page 9 2 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 2 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 2 e Cables on page 9 2 e Mounting Options on page 9 4 The optional electrochemical oxygen sensor shown in Figure 1 4 determines the oxygen concentration by measuring the rate of an oxidation reduction reaction that occurs in a closed cell that is exposed to the sample stream The cell is similar to a battery in construction and consists of an enclosure that holds two electrodes The negatively charged cathode which is also called the working electrode is formed from a flat PTFE tape coated with an active catalyst The positively charged anode is formed from a block of lead The entire cell is sealed from exposure to the atmosphere and is filled with conductive electrolyte that allows transfer of ionic species between the two electrodes The two electrodes are connected to pins that protrude from the bottom of the assembly which allow the sensor to be electrically connected to the instrument The optional paramagnetic oxygen sensor provides functionality similar to that of the electrochemical sensor However it works on a totally different principal and should function indefinitely without replacement In addition to the extended operating life the paramagnetic sensor provides enhanced precision and response time The paramagnetic sensor operates on the principle that oxygen is a paramagnetic compound and is
393. umber This command reports the variable number and name stored at index in the scratch pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 12 which is for the fuel pressure Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 12 fuel psi set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the lrec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 15 Receive set sp field 1 5 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging stream per This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the strea
394. ument Configuration Pire EH DHOBM Pv EE eee PEE MEE Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Alarms Menu Alarms Menu The Alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer The alarms are grouped into three categories Concentration Alarms Other Alarms and System Alarms If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm high or low the status will go from OK to FAIL The total number of alarms detected is displayed at the top of the menu To see the actual reading or alarm condition of a specific item and to view the minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press E Note that the motherboard status interface board status detector board status and optional I O expansion board status are read only screens that indicate whether power supplies are working and that connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration The Concentration Alarms menu is used to view
395. un time schedule the first execution for the selected autocal sequence Table 3 6 describes how to use the front panel pushbuttons to set the date and time e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Set Autocal Schedule gt Cal Sequence 1 or 2 gt Next Run ERED Se Ea Ex di BUE Lid BPs EEE CELL pbi USE CELL Table 3 6 Front Panel Pushbutton Usage to Set Date and Time Pushbutton Function Changes the currently settable parameter Scrolls through the time parameters Saves the new date and time to the system clock Model 60 Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Calibration Menu Frequency The Frequency screen is used to configure the frequency of the selected autocalibration sequence from the starting point of the Next Run previously discussed Note that a frequency of Od Oh disables the next run and turns off the cal sequence Press 9 to save the changes or to exit without saving g g e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Set Autocal Schedule gt Cal Sequence 1 or 2 gt Frequency Probe Blowback The Probe Blowback Schedule menu is used to configure the probe Schedule Menu blowback schedule for the 627 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup gt Probe Blowback Schedule DH Guided fo Fib Pibbd Next Blowback Time The Next Blowback Time screen is used to configure the start
396. und and span factors back to the original default values e Define the calibration sequences the events that make up those sequences and set the auto calibration schedule e Define the probe blowback schedule including the time between blowbacks and the duration To use the Calibration Setup menu move the cursor to the item of interest and press Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Define Cylinders Operation Calibration Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration Setup prak pruni HE PATE EH DHOBM PPP L Evi LL PE The Define Cylinders menu is used to describe the composition of the span gas cylinders that will be used to calibrate the Model 607 When Define Cylinders is selected the screen displays a list of cylinder numbers along with a list of span gases that are contained in each cylinder e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Calibration Setup Define Cylinders EH DHOBM To select a cylinder use J _4 to move the cursor and then press to open the Define Cylinder screen for the selected cylinder The screen will then list all compounds that the 607 analyzer is capable of reporting or correcting for and will display the current span concentration for each one If the cylinder does not contain a specific gas the concentration entry for that gas should be set to zero Note If the cylinder contains a gas that your analyzer is not configured to measure the co
397. ure alarm min B 54 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page temp min value for umbilical 1 sys alarm umb 2 Reports sets the system umbilical temperature alarm max B 54 temp max value for umbilical 2 sys alarm umb 2 Reports sets the system umbilical temperature alarm min B 54 temp min value for umbilical 2 sys bb duration Reports sets the duration for system blowback B 33 sys bb period Reports sets the system blowback period B 34 sys power probe Reports sets the status of the component power for the B 34 barrel system probe barrel On Off sys power probe Reports sets the status of the component power for the B 34 filter system probe filter On Off sys power umbilical Reports sets the status of the component power for umbilical B 34 1 1 On Off sys power umbilical Reports sets the status of the component power for umbilical B 34 2 2 On Off sys probe barrel set Reports sets the set temperature for the system probe barrel B 35 temp sys probe filter set Reports sets the set temperature for the system probe filter B 35 temp Thermo Fisher Scientific sys temps Reports probe filter probe barrel umbilical 1 and umbilical 2 B 55 temperatures in degrees C sys umb 1 settemp Reports sets the set temperature for umbilical zone 1 B 36 sys umb 2 settemp Reports sets the set temperature for umbilical zone 2 B 36 temp comp Reports sets temperatu
398. ure is enabled or disabled for each gas Position the cursor at the gas Service of interest and press to proceed to the Edit Lin Parameter screen Y for that gas Multipoint Lin Setup Y Enable a Gas Y Set No of Points 2 10 Y Setup Points e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Multipoint Lin Setup EH DHOBM LP USE PL iud Bast ade 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 125 Operation Service Menu Edit Linearization The Edit Linearization Parameters screen provides the operator access to Parameters enable or disable multipoint linearization for the selected gas and allows access choose the number of points used and to set up these points If multipoint linearization for the selected gas is currently disabled the Edit Lin Params screen will indicate this as shown below e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Multipoint Lin Setup gt select a gas Press to and the Enable Disable Screen will appear Press again to change the setting to Enabled and then press W_ to return to the Edit Linearization Parameters screen With linearization enabled the Edit Lin Params screen will now appear as shown below 3 126 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Number of Points Thermo Fisher Scientific Setup Points Operation Service Menu The Set Number of Points screen i
399. used with this analyzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 60i Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface which is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface which is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix E Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer provides information on how to establish data communications between a DCS PLC and the 603 describes typical 60 communications functions and provides an example of how to set up the 60 to trigger calibration events S afety Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer If the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Safety and Equipment This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety Dama ge Alerts hazards and risks of equipment damag
400. utput 1 was configured to provide sample mode status information however you must configure your digital outputs for your particular application A E 4 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications Table E 2 Accessing System Status via MODBUS C Link or Digital Outputs Digital Outputs No Rear Panel Description MODBUS C Link Read Coil Command 1 Pin 1 Sample mode 3 dout 1 2 Pin 2 Zero mode 4 dout 2 3 Pin 3 Span mode 5 dout 3 4 Pin 4 Cylinder 1 6 dout 4 5 Pin 5 Cylinder 2 7 dout 5 6 Pin 6 Cylinder 3 8 dout 6 7 Pin 7 Cylinder 4 9 dout 7 8 Pin 8 Cylinder 5 10 dout 8 9 Pin 9 Cylinder 6 11 dout 9 10 Pin 10 Event running 15 dout 10 i 5 General alarm 16 12 E Blowback 12 T Only 10 digital outputs are available Ne Digital Outputs Pin 10 Digital Output 10 Pin 1 Digital Output 1 Figure E 3 Digital Outputs Rear Panel Pinouts Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 60 Instruction Manual E 5 Interfacing a DCS PLC with the Model 60i Multi Gas Analyzer Establishing Communications Trigger Events E 6 Model 60i Instruction Manual The 60 allows the user to initiate system events by any of the following methods e MODBUS write coils e Clink commands e Digital input activate connections Refer to Table E 3 for the digital inpu
401. valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The standard instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 596 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The optional I O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 596 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in firmware if required Model 60 Instruction Manual 8 11 Component Description 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs Serial Ports 8 12 Model 60i Instruction Manual The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the volt
402. well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character can precede the precision specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four
403. which is displayed on instrument start up The start screen defaults to screen 1 Some of the Run screens come pre defined at the factory but they can still be edited e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 607 Instruction Manual 3 115 Operation Service Menu The Select Run Screen menu is used to select a Run screen to edit and to display the Edit Run Screen menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen Edit Run Screen The Edit Run Screen menu is used to edit the contents of the selected custom Run screen Figure 3 5 This menu allows the user to edit the Run screen title toggle the Run screen On and Off specify the number of items to be displayed on the Run screen 1 10 and to assign a parameter to each item Title Bar Instrument Readings Edit Title The Edit Title screen is used to edit the contents of the title bar Figure 3 5 on the selected Custom Run screen Refer to Table 3 18 for a list of the default Run screen titles 3 116 Model 60i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Table 3 18 Default Run Screen Titles RunScreen Default Title 1 Concentrations 2 Other Measurements 3 Analog Inputs 4 Calibration Cylinder 5 External Alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Setup Run Screens gt Select a Run Screen Edit Title ERED EN ETE CELL EH mri
404. will be included in a streaming record set the streaming interval and data format and add or delete the timestamp and data label from each record e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a streaming data record is exported The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Streaming Data Config Interval The Add Labels menu item allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each data point in the streaming record will have a label attached e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Streaming Data Config Add Labels Thermo Fisher Scientific Prepend Timestamp Add Flags Item Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Prepend Time Stamp menu item allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each streaming data record will start with a time and date stamp indicating when that record was generated e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Prepend Timestamp The Add Flags menu item allows the operator to toggle between YES and NO If set to YES then each s
405. yte Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Function code 4 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Addresses Supported Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported Table C 1 through Table C 3 list the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 60 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 607 Coil Number Status 0 NONE LOCAL REMOTE SERVICE SAMPLE MODE ZERO MODE SPAN MODE CYLINDER 1 ACTIVE CYLINDER 2 ACTIVE CYLINDER 3 ACTIVE CYLINDER 4 ACTIVE CYLINDER 5 ACTIVE CYLINDER 6 ACTIVE BLOWBACK PURGE CHECK CAL EVENT RUNNING GENERAL ALARM CONC MAX CO ALARM CONC MIN CO ALARM CONC MAX C02 ALARM CONC MIN C02 ALARM CONC MAX NO ALARM co co Gc5 c C2 pr gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o O1 99 N N o N Model 60 Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Addresses Supported C 10 Model 60i Instruction Manual Coil Number Status 22 C

Model 60i - Thermo Scientific

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents